Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4393 - Contract - Wardroup & Associates - ADA Construction. Best Scan Possible - 02/24/1994Resolution No. 4393 February 24, 1994 Item #16 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and between the City of Lubbock and Wardroup and Associates of Lubbock, Texas, to furnish and install all materials as bid for the ADA Construction at Various Municipal Buildings - Phase I for the City of Lubbock, which contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this 24th day of February 1994. ATTEST: etty N& 7 hnson, eity Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, leurchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: Assistant City Attorney DGV :dp\G:\ccdocs\Wudroup.Res February 15, 1994 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I BID #12812 /{393 l� 6y „ Y L; CITY OF i Lubbock, Texas M O1 M O O N 0 r CLOSE DATE: JANUARY 20,1994 AT 2 P.M. BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDENDUM # 1 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. FOR CLARIFICATION, ALTERNATE NO. 3: Any alterations to the public pay telephones or the adjusting of heights will be performed by Southwestern Bell or AT & T. Contractor shall coordinate the work and patch. 2. FOR CLARIFICATION, TOILET PARTITIONS: Provide primed toilet partitions items noted on the plans, and paint to match existing color at the following locations: Mahon Library, Godeke Library and the Lubbock International Airport. At the airport existing partitions are plastic, if exact color cannot be matched, provide primed metal items and paint to match existing. At the Central Senior Citizens Center, match as close as possible with manufacturer's standard colors. 3. ALTERNATE NO. 2: At the Health Department and Maxey Community Center, scarify existing striping shown to be removed - 4. SI -MET A4 - P.'1UNICIPAL. BUILD51G, ALTERNATE NO. 2: Delete ALTERNATF NO.2 from the bid at this site only. 5. SHEET Al2 - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, ALTERNATE NO. 3: Omit Note 7 from bid. 6. SHEET Al2 - LUBBOCK RTIERNATIONAL AIRPORT, ALTERNATE NO. 3: Notes S and 6 Contractor shall perform work noted and patch. 7. SHEET A15 - CEMETERY OFFICE: Note 10 - Floor will be tested and abated if necessary by the Owner before work is scheduled to begin. 8. SIdEET A15 - CEMETERY OFFICE: Note 14 - Omit Note 14. _ ,133 rj'14���1 d / Office of Purchasing '^ City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 .' : • t� ._._ .._. 606-767-2167 _ 5 k MAILED TO VENDOR JANUARY 18, 1994 r CLOSE DATE: JANUARY 20,1994 AT 2 P.M. BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDENDUM # 1 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. FOR CLARIFICATION, ALTERNATE NO. 3: Any alterations to the public pay telephones or the adjusting of heights will be performed by Southwestern Bell or AT & T. Contractor shall coordinate the work and patch. 2. FOR CLARIFICATION, TOILET PARTITIONS: Provide primed toilet partitions items noted on the plans, and paint to match existing color at the following locations: Mahon Library, Godeke Library and the Lubbock International Airport. At the airport existing partitions are plastic, if exact color cannot be matched, provide primed metal items and paint to match existing. At the Central Senior Citizens Center, match as close as possible with manufacturer's standard colors. 3. ALTERNATE NO. 2: At the Health Department and Maxey Community Center, scarify existing striping shown to be removed - 4. SI -MET A4 - P.'1UNICIPAL. BUILD51G, ALTERNATE NO. 2: Delete ALTERNATF NO.2 from the bid at this site only. 5. SHEET Al2 - LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, ALTERNATE NO. 3: Omit Note 7 from bid. 6. SHEET Al2 - LUBBOCK RTIERNATIONAL AIRPORT, ALTERNATE NO. 3: Notes S and 6 Contractor shall perform work noted and patch. 7. SHEET A15 - CEMETERY OFFICE: Note 10 - Floor will be tested and abated if necessary by the Owner before work is scheduled to begin. 8. SIdEET A15 - CEMETERY OFFICE: Note 14 - Omit Note 14. E ' a F r All requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing ( and directed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer. THANK YOU, Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID 4,. 6' ��,OCIATES WARi3Fc01 � &A_ W406, Brawnliatd D""* — "V 5 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 7J457 606-767-2167 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR JANUARY 20,1994 OLD CLOSE DATE: JANUARY 20,1994 AT 2 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: FEBRUARY 1, 1994 AT 2 P.M. BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDENDUM # 2 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. The closing date has been changed. FROM: January 20, 1994 at 2:00 p.m. TO: February 1, 1994 at 2:00 p.m All requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing and directed to Ron Sheffield, Senior Buyer. THANK YOU, Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer pLEASE RETURN ONE Copy WITH YOUR BID 44^�l 4 14 v r; Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR JANUARY 20,1994 OLD CLOSE DATE: JANUARY 20,1994 AT 2 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: FEBRUARY 1, 1994 AT 2 P.M. BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDENDUM # 2 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. The closing date has been changed. FROM: January 20, 1994 at 2:00 p.m. TO: February 1, 1994 at 2:00 p.m All requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing and directed to Ron Sheffield, Senior Buyer. THANK YOU, Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer pLEASE RETURN ONE Copy WITH YOUR BID Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: JANUARY�S; �9 ,c'r.0SF DATE: FEBRU:#.R-' 1, 2904 AT 2 C. BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDENDUM # 3 (� Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: IN THE SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 08710, 2.6, Bl; Alternate No. 4: Change specified closure to: Set 1- Health Department 1 pair exterior 1 pair vestibule 4 Ea. Equalizers 4820 r 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936WP (Exterior) . ; 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior) 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior Vestibule) 1 Ea. Control Box 982 SES X S72717 1 Ea. Control Box 982 Tubing Set 2 - Municipal Building (City Hall) j Municipal Square 1 pair exterior 2 Ea. Equalizers 4820 1Ea. Touch Pad 936WP (Exterior) 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior) 1 Ea. Control Box 982 Tubing City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 606-767-2167 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: JANUARY�S; �9 ,c'r.0SF DATE: FEBRU:#.R-' 1, 2904 AT 2 C. BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDENDUM # 3 (� Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: IN THE SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Section 08710, 2.6, Bl; Alternate No. 4: Change specified closure to: Set 1- Health Department 1 pair exterior 1 pair vestibule 4 Ea. Equalizers 4820 r 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936WP (Exterior) . ; 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior) 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior Vestibule) 1 Ea. Control Box 982 SES X S72717 1 Ea. Control Box 982 Tubing Set 2 - Municipal Building (City Hall) j Municipal Square 1 pair exterior 2 Ea. Equalizers 4820 1Ea. Touch Pad 936WP (Exterior) 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior) 1 Ea. Control Box 982 Tubing IN THE PLANS: 4. Page No. A-11, Codeke Library. See clouded area for notes pertaining to door closure e (Alternate #4). All requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing and directed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer. PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID 7 Set 3 - Police Department 1 Sgt. Door Exterior 1 Sgl. Door Interior Vestibule 2 Ea. Equalizers 4820 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936WP (Exterior) 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior) 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 (Interior Vestibule) 1 Ea. Control Box 982S Tubing Set 4 - Godeke Library . 1 Sgl. Door Exterior 1 Ea. Equalizers 4820 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936WP 1 Ea. Touch Pad 936 1 Ea. Control Box 981 Tubing I 2. Section 14240, 2.01 Manufacturers. Add. Montgomery Elevator Company to the list of r^ f approved manufacturers. 3. If Alternate No. 4 is accepted, a sixty (60) day time extension shall be awarded to only those locations noted in the drawings to receive elevator modification. IN THE PLANS: 4. Page No. A-11, Codeke Library. See clouded area for notes pertaining to door closure e (Alternate #4). All requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing and directed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer. PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID 7 s I 3 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texes 79457 606-767-2167 BIAILED TO VENDOR: CLOSE DATE: Office of Purchasing JANUARY 27,1994 FEBRUARY 1, 1994, AT 2 P.M. BID 012812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS ' PHASE I ADDENDUM # 4 Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows: 1. In Addendum #3; In the Specifications, item #3 is stated incorrectly. Item #3 should read: "If � lter mte #1 is accepted a.sildy (64) d --y time etnsion should be awarded 0 only those locations noted in the drawings to receive elevator modification." All requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing and directed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer. i THANK YOU, i' r gin Shafi;Ptd Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE Copy WITH YOUR BID r k N 9 8 1994 �., - r r CITY OF LUBBOCK REQUEST FOR BIDS FOR TITLE: ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 12812 PROJECT NUMBER: 1491-552101-9822 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE i NOTICE TO BIDDERS r r i NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #12812 Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock a.m. on the 20th day of January. 1994, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer at his office and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 27th day of January. 1994, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current BestRating of B or suverior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. r The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a pre-bid conference on 12th day of January. 1994, at 10.00 o'clock am.,in Conference Room 108, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. C OF L OCK Ron Sheffield SENIOR B R o. ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS BID # 12812 Sealed bids addressed to Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, Purchasing Department, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the Purchasing Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401 until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 20th day of January,1994, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed proposals will be opened in the office of the Buyer and publicly read aloud. The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of Lubbock. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. There will be a prebid conference on the 12th day of January, 1994, at 10:00 a.m., in Conference Room 108, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street, Room t L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF UBBOCK Ron S eld SENIOR B R GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 7, GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 60 (sixty) working days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 5. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. ;! 7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. i 8. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. -- 12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and _ when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost r— C f and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. o, 14. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. !"~ In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for E , all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall f" further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 16. INSURANCE l' The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will l be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. << 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 18. 19 20. (2)Delays in constructio: penalty provisions of th, within the allotted tii-�- Before construction work requii Owner's Representative not ler obtain written permission from construction work requiring a:, In any event, if a conditionsho_ ' which is hazardous or dangers of the week or the time of dad , PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEE S The contractor and each of h i . contract in full (less mandatory ' once each week. The Contr. seventh day following the payor copy of such payroll. This sha" day, rate of pay, and net paN . or deductions (except as shoN . Contractor must classify emp:, of per diem wages, which sch:^ The Contractor shall forfeit a< laborer, workman, or mech,an paid less than the wages assignl diem wages included in these c PROVISIONS CONCERNING Proposals submitted containing decreases in the cost of materia:; without being considered. PREPARATION FOR PROPO : The bidder shall submit his prop,-. and the bidder shall state the prit furnish the materials required. ;-.,, discrepancy between the price wri the proposal is submitted by ar:' submitted by a firm, associaticr signed by a member of the firn company or corporation, the co:: official or duly authorized agent, certified and must be in writinf, Each proposal shall be enclosed outside of the envelope in the fog (a) Bidder's name (b) Proposal for (description ,- for. The Contractor is approaching the diligent effort to complete the contract holidays, the Contracts ie m,r holiday he desires to final decision on whether '' c' Owner'sRepresentati% ; %c work being done under this contract c1y commence work, regardless of the day ginger dangerous to property or life. seed in work on the project under this -ible without discount, not less often than f the work shall not later than the or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible the number of hours worked on each )rrect copy of such payroll, that no rebates the wages paid as shown thereon. The the schedule of general prevailing rate contract is made, ten dollars for each rich laborer, workman or mechanic is chedule of general prevailing rate of per ed bid price due to increases or rejected and returned to the bidder cs in'tlie form shall be correctly filled in scs to do the work contemplated or 0_Jbly, or typewritten. Incase of Price written in words shall govern. If <Uly authorized agent. If a proposal is 1)bcr must be given and the proposal ,d. If the proposal is submitted by a be given, and the proposal signed by an sign proposals in tbe properly be executed in ink. ice to Bidders, and endorsed on the Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 21. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Proposal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 0 BID PROPOSAL 19 r BID PROPOSAL ' LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT PLACE: LUBBOCK, TEXAS r - DATE: 1 FEBRUARY 1994 PROJECT NUMBER: 12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I Proposalof W.C. WARDROUP DBA WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES (hereinafter called Bidder) *= To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: �^ The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS -- PHASE I fications, instructions to biddcrs, notice to bidders and all other related contract having carefully examined the plans, speci documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the .10' proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. TOTAL MATERIALS: EIGHTY-THREE THOUSAND AND NO/100---------------------------(S 83,000.00 ) ?bird/ ,#;4ve we r TOTAL SERVICES: FOR#-TiiR= THOUSAND AND NO/100--------------------------- (S Adye Oa i TOTAL BID: ONE HUNDRED TWENTY -5" THOUSAND AND NO/100------------------------/X2i4we' ALTERNATE 1- ELEVATOR UPGRADE: TOTAL MA'T'ERIAL: SIXTY-FIVE THOUSAND AND NO/100---------------------------(S 65,000.00 ) TOTAL SERVICES: FOURTEEN THOUSAND AND NO/100-----------------------------(S 140000.00 ) TOTAL BID ALTERNATE T: SEVENTY-NINE THOUSAND AND NO/100------------------{S 79,000.00 ) ALTERNATE 2 - HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING WITH STRIPING AND SIGNAGE: TOTAL MATERIAL: SEVEN THOUSAND AND NO/100--------------------------------(S 7,000.00 ) TOTAL SERVICES: FIVE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED TWENTY-FIVE AND NO/100--------(S 5,525.00 ) L TOTAL BID ALTERNATE 2: TWELVE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED TWENTY-FIVE & NO/100---- (S 12 -525.00 r i A ar 4. fi7 ALTERNATE 3 - PUBLIC PAY Pl1ONE UPGRADE: LIMITED TO COORDINATE, I. ITEM 6--- SHEET A_ 12 ----- ...,, „Tnii nn----------- 1 TERIAL• PATC71 AND. 1000.00 TOTAL MA --------- (s_ 2000.0_0 ) TOTAL SERVICES: TW 0 SAND AND )/100 ---------— S 3000.00 ) TOTAL BID ALTERNATE 3: THREE THOUSAND AND NO/ 100— ---- ALTERNATE 4 - RETROFIT ENTRY DOORS TO AUTOMATIC DOORS: (S 7000 TOTAL MATERIAL: SEVEN ►.�TTTT x*rn *Tnl1 00 TOTAL SERVICES: FIVE USAND NINE ) TOTAL BID ALTERNATE 4I'WELVE THOUSAND NI*TP HUNDRED (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) " i to Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 60 working days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum ors rn0,o0 (ONE I1UN DRED DOLLARS for each working day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as mors fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders. .d� nderstands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids Bidder uthe not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after and to waive any fomiallty to the br ng• The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may scheduled closing time for receiving bids. +^ undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work anus carefully commencemined �work on or plans, The un g this bid, andagrees specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by y p provided before the date and co cd in the written notfce to proceed, and to substantial) •coin tete the work on which he has bid; as p the contract documents. Bidders arc required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a�� is s check ble cert fi a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, ut check issued by rcent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitte, " recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than rive (if required) within 10 days after notice of avian a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary the contract to him. Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for S or a Proposal Bond in the sum otFIVE PERCENT mages s MAXI -MM MMM B e event the pro°ip l is accept which( the Owner as li uiiat� is = which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by q with the Owner and the undersigneowner wid d fails to execute the necessary contract documents the sal;tomS(if heck or bond shall tr ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance P returned to the undersigned upon demand. r �r �o Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: •. ^ Secretary Contractor BY: W.0 WARDROUP, OWNER 4408 BROWNFIELD DRIVE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79410 FAX 806/793-2055 806/7958032 r T2 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS �A This form shall be completed and submitted with the Bidder's Proposal. L VELASQUEZ PAINTING # �.�• Off. elevator n 3. ANTHONY MECHANICAL 4. ^*� S. 6. .r 7. 8. �1006 9. 10. u Minority Owned , Yes No X WASHINGTON C-,'rE-LNAT10`Al, C%Sl_?r,LNa ax&jr.a,`'y KNOW ALL bCLN BY THESE FEE.SENTS: That We. W.C. WARDROUP DBA WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES BID OR PROPOSAL BOND (here,: -titer rolled the -c;.: e). cs i~.: c;.c1. cd WASEI NGTON L, iL'-LNATIONAL NSUF 45CF CO. , e =rxr.er. our,,--_ �... ized cad doing business under ee by virtue of the Icxs of the Stere of ARIZONA , =d July licensed for tim purpose of �- c --g quo=teeing cz.b*==ing sole suraty_u;—.a bonds or urde..:z:ags :aqui-ed or =; csad --Y the fe+vs.ef the_Stc:e of. TEXAS a St.—aty, ore held cd &:nnly bated unto CITY OF LUBBOCK ( a:eir.c--"er wed the Obligeei In size just and hZ sssm of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID -------------- ---------------- DOU= (S----------5%-----4 lcwiW acney of the United Steres of Americo for Nue ;=f --eat cf which, well ed truly to be race, we hereby bind ourselves =d our Qd ec:: of our successes ed assigns, jointly cd seve-riy, ti,r !y by these ;marts THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THEAT. VII-EMERIIAS. the cove bcunden .,::mcipc! cs corescd, is ebct t to !tend is t_ d submit to the obligee a bid or proposal for the ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS — PHASE I BID NO. 12812 In ccxdesce with the gloss =d sgeci8cc:dc= filed in the office of the obligee cad under the :notice inviting FreF_ads therefor. NOW. TfiEFORZ if the'bid or grcposei of sod Fri= -Fd shall be ¢cepted, end the c=trct for such work be ewcded to the prindp 1 thereupon by the said obligee, crd acid Frncpd shill enter sato c rAtr ccs pad bond' for the ' cc:aFletica of said work ra required by lair, then this eblfgdfea to be gull and veld, otherwise to be cad remain in full force pad effect IN WITNESS WIMMOF, said P.=dpei pad said Surety home =used these presents to be duly sig -•.-ed and seded this 20TH day of JANUARY .19 94 W.C. WARDROUP DBA WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES By , CLL--� 'FI.LLtACE G`. W.AX-:DROUP91 GiASEINGiON REM N ON LqSUR?.I,NC:. COMPANY By K VIN�-�� General WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL NEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington International Insurance Company,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Schaumburg, Illinois, does hereby constitute and appoint HOWARD COWAN, KEVIN DUNN AND NARLA HILL ' • its true and lawful attorneyCs)-in-fact to execute, seat and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and alt `r.. bowls and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are c- ..,y be aiiur', required, or permitted by law, statute, rule, regulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instruments) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said Washington International Insurance Company as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same has been duly executed and acknowledged by its President at its principal office. This Power of Attorney shall be limited in amount to 52,000,000.00 for any single obligation. This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to iuthorfty granted by the resolutions of the Board of Directors adopted �... March 22, 1978, July 3, 1980 and October 21, 1986 which read, in part, as follows: 1. The President may designate Attorneys -fn -Fact, and authorize them to execute an behalf of the Commpany, and attach the Seal of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and to appoint Special Attorneys -in -Fact, who are hereby authorized to certify to copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuant to this section and/or any of the By-laws of the »- Company, and to remove, at any time, any such Attorney -in -Fact or Special Attorney -in -Fact and revoke the authority givers him." 2. The signatures of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate seal of the Company, may be affixed to any Power of Attorney, certificate, bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile. Any such Power of Attorney, certificate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shalt be valid and binding upon the company. IN TESTI! corporate STATE OF s International Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its authorized offigpr, this Ath day of November, 1992. IONAL INSURANCE COMPANY V On this 18th day o�1Tdv`ember, 1992, before we came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to are personally known, and, being by me duly sworn, said that he is the therein described and authorizes! officer of the Washington International Insurance Comparry; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company; IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal, the day and year first above written. t✓W-.r�.��l./'�./�../�u/../-fir' 'OFFICIAL SERV CHRISTINE ZARETSKY n Notary PmJSGc, State of IiGaois s C istinwe Zaretsky; Notary Public. my Cortnission Expires tober 7,-1996 MY Cammm'ss:oh EvA es 10-7.46 ..n',r.eaF ac alas-m-..-lERiiFlCATF STATE OF ILLINOIS ) COUNTY OF COOK ) I, the undersigned, Secretary of WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an ARIZONA Corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked, and furthermore that Article 111, Section 5 of the By -Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board. of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney, are now in force. Signed and seated in the County of Cook. Dated t OTH ,of J , 19 94 , Lewis N. Moeller, Secretary 7 7 PAYMENT BOND I u I r*� CTanQ %70 . S- 300 -gels 9 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION, 1959 4 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and / (hereinafter call�d_the S ety�(s) a AU, s), ar eld and rmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of T ``'V` lars (S 13 VQno • M lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Sure bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the P 'ncipal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the�q � day of tdAd�, 19,�, to and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHE OF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrune t this da of 19 14 /ilJAj b Surety Principal s *By. (Title) V ttifti Y\ ATT' IN FACT' BOND CHECK BEST RATING 13 -t LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE lhellq BY_._. � By: (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates r FH O W A g p C (j W A flan agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service _ of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety *By,:_ (Title) N UkYV& Approved as to form: ATTY IN FACT; City of L bock r Y: ity Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. �' I I PERFORMANCE BOND �.d �%. '5- moo- fess dr LB STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REG S SSION 1959 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, �- U" (helve r called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and 1^ ereinafter cal e S ) S ar e d d rmly bound unto the ity of L k (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount o M3ars ($ 3 .400-43) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. C, yy(( WHEREAS, the Princi 1 has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the2 4ay of I to 4, w l and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise ro to remain in full force and effect. 4 PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, regular session 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHE 1 F, the said Principal s and r 19�� P () Surety (s) have signed and this ins ent s�p�YL�`/ 5 , Cc Surety Principal ' * B: •• (Tike)A BOND CHECK By: BEST RATING (Title) ATTY IN FACT LICENSED IN TEXAS DATE s rolgk BY 2-�`-'--- BY: (Title) By: (Title) ggGd surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates 110 WAF 1;6 af''��,Int resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and n w om ce of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Surety *By. (Title) U i A b'u V" IL Approved as to Form ATTY IN FACT. City bock City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. u t renerat WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY r POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Washington International Insurance Company,a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona, and having its principal office in the Village of Schaumburg, Illinois, does hereby constitute and appoint • ' HOWARD COWAN, KEVIN DUNK AND MARLA HILL I,• its true and lawful attorneys) -in -fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, 1 which -are c- = f be required, or permitted by law, statute, rule, regulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such irtstrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shalt be as binding upon the said Washington International Insurance Company as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same has been duty executed and acknowledged by its President at its principal office. This Power of Attorney shall be limited in amocnt to 22,000,000.00 for any single obligation. This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to authority granted by the resolutions of the Board of Directors adopted !Larch 22, 1978, July 3, 1980 and October 21, 1966 which read, in part, as follows: w 1. The President may designate Attorneys -in -Fact, and authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the Seat of the Company thereto, bonds, and undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory; in the nature thereof, and to appoint Special Attorneys -in -Fact, who are hereby authorized to certify to copies of any power-of-attorney issued in pursuant to this section and/or any of the By -Laws of the Company, and to remove, at any time, any such Attorney -in -Fact or Special Attorney -in -Fact and revoke the authority 11 given him." 2. The signatures of the Chairman of the Board, the President, Vice President, Assistant Secretary, Treasurer and Secretary, and the corporate seal of the Company, may be affixed to any Power of Attorney, certificate, bond or undertaking relating thereto, by facsimile. Any such Power of Attorney, certificate bond or undertaking bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal affixed in the ordinary course of business shall be valid and binding upon the company. IN TESTIMONY corporate se, STATE OF ington International Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be signed and its its authorized offiSfr, thisAth day of November, 1992. • .GI z CORPORATE'. o S SEAL • r*� �IRIZONA 9.4p i t y •.s.s.• �`1 0 t0IJKTY OFtRM * lk-t;!o On this 18th day oiM—feiber, 1992, before me came the personally known, and, being by me duly sworn, said that Washington International Insurance Company, that the seal Company: TIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY ce President individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me he is the therein described and authorized officer of the affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seat, the day and year first above written. "OFFICIAL SEAL" S CNRJSTINE ZARETSKY Notary h5fic. State of I inois 1 �istine Zaretskyi Notary Public. My Commission Expire tober 7,-1996 Mr Gmm'ts oh Expires 10-7-96 1 aFmom mo-zo--r&-- tERTIPnt kTE STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF COOK 1, the undersigned, Secretary of WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an ARIZONA Corporation, 00 HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force and has not been revoked, and furthermore that Article 111, Section S of the By -Laws of the Corporation, and the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney, are now in force. Signed at,d seated in the County of Cook. Opted t1 24THdaY,of IF 19 / 194. Lewts M. Moeller, Secretary r" CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 1 A1:111:1). CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ISSUE DATE (MM/DD/YY) 3/3/94 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND THE INWEST GROUP, INC. CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE 6 DESTA DRIVE, SUITE 5550 DOL CIES BEOES NOT LOW. AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE j MIDLAND, TEXAS 79705 NY A COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPA LETTER I OKLAHOMA SURETY I COMPANY B tINSURED LETTER b ' W. C. WARDROUP DBA COMPARNY C LETTE WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES P. 0. BOX 6999 COMPANY D LUBBOCK, TEXAS, 79493 LETTER COMPANY E LETTER r COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ' CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LTR DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DD/YY) LIMITS A GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE _ 500000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FORTHCOMING 3/3/94 3/3/95 PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG. S CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR. PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY S X OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $ 500000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE S d LIMIT ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) $ HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) S GARAGE LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE S EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE S OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKER'S COMPENSATION STATUTORY LIMITS AND EACH ACCIDENT $ EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE—POLICY LIMIT $ DISEASE—EACH EMPLOYEE $ j, OTHER NAMED INSURED: CITY OF LUBBOCK 1. P. 0. BOX 2000 r* LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID 412812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILINGS - PHASE I PRO G CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITY OF LUBBOCK SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE P- 0. BOX 2000 EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. � AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE r ACORD 25-S (7190) �b"CORPORATION 1990 F CERTIFICATE OF -INSURANCE ISSUE DATE (MM/DDNY) 3/3/94 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND THE INWEST GROUP, INC. CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE 6 DESTA DRIVE, SUITE 5550 DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE MIDLAND, TEXAS 79705 POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPAN L Y A LETTER � OKLAHOMA SURETY COMPANY 6 1INSURED LETTER OKLAHOMA SURETY W. C. WARDROUP DBA COMPANY WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES LETTER C+ 4 P. 0. BOX 6999 COMPANY LETTER D TEXAS WC INSURANCE FUND i, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79493 COMPANY LETTER E COVERAGES ALBANY INSURANCE COMPANY THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, P' EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. !) CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS :LTR DATE (MM/DD/YY) DATE (MM/DD/YY) FA GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE 32000000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CGL202005 10/1/93 10/1/94 PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG. $2000000 CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR. PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $ 1000000 OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT. EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1000000 CFIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 50000 MED. EXPENSE (Any one person) S i AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 5000 X ANY AUTO CBA6026 10/1/93 10/1/94 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ ALL OWNED AUTOS 1000000 SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ X HIRED AUTOS X NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE $ EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKER'S COMPENSATION X STATUTORY LIMITS ,D AND TSF10418501 10/1/93 10/1/94 EACH ACCIDENT $ 500000 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DISEASE—POLICY LIMIT $ 500000 DISEASE—EACH EMPLOYEE S S,n,,n !'E BUILDER RISK 8S22317 10/1/93 10/1/94 $1,250,000 LIMIT $1,000 DEDUCTIBLE i UtbUHIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATIONS/VEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDING - PHASE I ADDITIONAL INSURED IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK 1 `CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATInFJ CITY OF LUBBOCK ( J . 0. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITSANTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE M. t �ACORD 25-S (7/90) xl q(44 s� CACORD COR ORATION 1990 IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. F7 I I CONTRACT i 7 CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 24th day of February 1994, by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and WARDROUP AND ASSOCIATES of the City of LUBBOCK, County of LUBBOCK, and the State of TEXAS, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby .. agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #12812 - ADA CONSTRUCTION AT VARIOUS MUNICIPAL BUILDINGS - PHASE I FOR $134,900.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, underthe terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. I The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on ',�.•� account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the �. year and day first above written. ii ATTEST: Corporate Secretary CONTRACTOR COMPLETE ADDRESS: 4408 Brownfield Drive Lubbock, Texas 79410 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT A F., 7 �FM* GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT ` 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. «. t" 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to GEORGE LISENBE BUILDING AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT ADMINISTRATO City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including the plans and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. G. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for Performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, famish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED -7- The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative.The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this cheek does not relieve the - Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend r I 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. t� 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION �•• It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any r" subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that — any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. -- 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation; shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be . eQ inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for �., observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by I the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. r• 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with Plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full 4 accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK 4 The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (151/o) per cent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers,materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall _ cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as annotice which may be Y y given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the k Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering r the operation of each subcontractor. I A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500.000 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived) The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. a 4 711, B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows: For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage,5$ 00,000 Combined Single Limit. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits'of not less than; _ Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. ` The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. _ D. Builder's Risk Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $500,000 with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. _ The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000 G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to arty change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. . ' 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY. EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. a 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES t The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. i If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement. -- 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $100.00 (One Hundred) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an .•, extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS *^� In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials famished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, C' which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any C damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the '.. Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the priceset forth in the proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly t i�" performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (3 1) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (3 1) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility forfaulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WIT MLD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. ,. 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the District .fudge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the decision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex Parte Proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the arbiters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY t` f r QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION. The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. 50. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement'of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and i r delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 51. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. 52. BONDS ' The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, P Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 100% of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds .� $25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 53. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 54. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual i': obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 55. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and controlhis own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 56. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987. � ATE I .r v Ranettd,-Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED T NTENT: 2 Bi 1 Pyne, D rector of Building Services r t B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: Do I G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney Resolution #2502 January 8, 1987 4: Agenda Item #18 OGV:da - RESOLUTION 4 WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of diem ' per wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and r WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February :.23, 1984; and ' WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated p ed at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of diem per wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: 4 1 Exhibit A: Building Construction*Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades Exhibit C: Electrical Trades Exhibit D: Overtime Rate Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987. � ATE I .r v Ranettd,-Boyd, City Secretary APPROVED T NTENT: 2 Bi 1 Pyne, D rector of Building Services r t B.C. McMINN, MAYOR APPROVED AS TO FORM: Do I G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate _ Acoustical Ceiling Installer $11.60 Air Conditioner Installer " 8.35 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 5.50 Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper 10.50 Carpenter 5.00 Carpenter -Helper 11.00 Cement Finisher 5.50 Drywall Hanger 7.35 _ Electrician 8.70 Electrician -Helper 10.50 Equipment Operator - 5.25 Heavy Light 8.00 Floor Installer 5.70 Glacier 8.00 _ Insulator, Piping/Boiler - 7.50 Insulator -Helper 9.50 Iron Worker 5.00 _ Laborer, General 1.30 Mortar Mixer 4.75• Painter 5.60 Plumber 8.75 -- Plumber-Helper 9.25 Roofer 6.00 Roofer -Helper 7.65 — Sheet Metal Worker 4.75 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 8.75 Welder - Certified 5. 50 5.50 _ 8.00 i EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer, General Laborer, Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machinist Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grade Operator. Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver - Light Heavy Hourly Rate $5.25 4.75 7.35 4.75 10.50 4.75 6.50 5.50 4.75 5.80 6.50 6.00 6.00 5.25 6.50 5.85 6.40 6.40 8.00 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.25 5.25 EXHIBIT C Electric Construction Trades - - Prevailing Wage Rates _ Craft Hourly Rate Power Line Foreman $11.00 _ Lineman Journeyman 10.45 Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90 Groundman Series 7.25 EXHIBIT 0 Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is l 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT E Prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is�1 1/2 times base rate. SPECIFICATIONS ADA COMPLIANCE - PHASE I CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS 3416 JOLIET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79413 (806) 792-2824 NOVEMBER 1993 SET NO. ADA COMPLIANCE - PHASE CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS NOVEMBER 1993 2'0_J• W TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS 3416 JOLIET AVENUE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79413 (806)792-2824 ADA COMPLIANCE — PHASE I CITY OF LUBBOCK ., LUBBOCKe TEXAS NOVEMBER 1993 TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS LUBBOCKr TEXAS IF r 10-9 TABLE OF CONTENTS — SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION .............................5 02110 SITE CLEARING 02200 ....................................4 EARTHWORK 02520 ........................................6 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING.................10 t DIVISION3 CONCRETE..................................NOT USED r DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY .....................................8 j DIVISION5 METALS.... ...... oo ....... 0 ................ NOT USED DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY... .... o— .................... o..5 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY.................................5 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK..................5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07901 JOINT SEALANTS ...................................7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS.................................6 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS................10 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 ....................................9 GLAZING., ...... o.o..o .... 0 ......... 9 DIVISION 9 FINISHES k ' 09200 LATH AND PLASTER................................11 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES., ...... o ........ o. -o .... 15 09300 TILE 09511 .............................................9 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09512 ........................6 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS .........................4 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING ..........................6 �-- 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS ......................7 { 09678 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES..............5 09900 PAINTING ........................................26 09950 WALL COVERINGS ...................................4 Y DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS ..............................6 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ......................4 l r 10-9 DIVISION11 EQUIPMENT.................................NOT USED DIVISION 12 pURNISBINGS...............................NOT USED DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ......................NOT USED DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM 14240 ELEVATOR.........................................5 DIVISION 15 PLUMBING 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS.................................3 .. 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS — SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02110 .............................5 SITE CLEARING !, 02200 ....................................4 EARTHWORK.... 02520 * ....... 0.0 ... 6 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING ....... 0......... 10 DIVISION3 CONCRETE ..................................NOT USED DIVISION 4 MASONRY r04200 UNIT MASONRY... .... 0 .................. 8 DIVISION5 METALS DIVISION 6 ....................................NOT USED WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06200 ..................................5 FINISH CARPENTRY... 06402 ............................ 0.5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK t ..................5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION r" 07901 JOINT SEALANTS ...................................7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS r'" 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS... 08410 ....... 0 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 08710 ................10 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 ....................................9 GLAZING ..........................................9 t DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09200 LATH AND PLASTER 09255 ................................11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09300 .........................15 TILE.* 09511 ... *.o ...... o ...... * 9 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ., 09512 ........................6 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS .........................4 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING.... 09666 ..... o ... o ............ 6 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09678 ....................ro ..7 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09900 ..............5 PAINTING........................................26 09950 WALL COVERINGS... .................. o 4 r- DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10800 ..............................6 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ......................4 DIVISION11 EQUIPMENT .................................NOT USED DIVISION12 FURNISHINGS P" f ...............................NOT USED j DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION.— ................... NOT USED �.. DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEM a 14240 ELEVATOR .........................................5 DIVISION 15 PLUMBING 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS.................................3 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section requires the selective removal and subsequent off-site disposal of the following: 1. Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. 2. Removal of interior partitions as indicated on drawings. 3. Removal of doors and frames indicated "remove." 4. Removal of built-in casework indicated "remove." 5. Removal and protection of existing fixtures, materials, and equipment items indicated "salvage." B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Remodeling construction work and patching are included within the respective sections of specifications, including removal of materials for reuse and incorporation into remodeling or new construction. 2. Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work is specified in other Divisions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Schedule indicating proposed sequence ofoperationsfor selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1 go t Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site r, operations. C. Photographs of existing conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Occupancy: Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations. B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. C. Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed. I. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to occupied portions of building. 2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 3. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 operations. 4. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 5. Remove protections at completion of work. E. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by,demolition work. F. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. G. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. 2. Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. I. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. PART 2 PRODUCTS;(Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 3 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 3.3 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: r. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION r■ Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - 02070 - 4 C. Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/90 r 3.1 PREPARATION �. A. General: Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 1. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 2. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. 3. Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner r. if shutdown of service is necessary during E changeover. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 3.3 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Salvaged Items: r. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION r■ Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - 02070 - 4 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC ; 2/90 Deliver to Owner," carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. B. Where noted to re -install toilet accessories and fixtures, carefully remove and store either off-site or on-site. Contractor will be responsible for all stored items. If, before removing items, the.Contractor notices cracked or damaged items, he will notify the Architect so that the Contractor will not be held responsible for damaged items. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. 1.: If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 3.5 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. 1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. END OF SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 5 r I Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 C SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �., A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Protection of existing trees indicated to remain. 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping. 4. Clearing and grubbing. 5. Removing above -grade improvements. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Conduct site -clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct l streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without ` permission from authorities having jurisdiction.. r� B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. C. Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. a SITE CLEARING r 02110 - 1 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 1. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coating formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 2. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed arborist to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 3. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full -growth status, as determined by arborist. D. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on owner's premises where indicated or directed. 1.4 EXISTING SERVICES A. General: Indicated locations are approximate determine exact locations before commencing Work. B. Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing, capping, and plugging utility services. Notify affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval before starting this Work. C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. PART 2 -� PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CLEARING A. General: Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots. 1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees' indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. SITE CLEARING 02110 -'2 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system. 2. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material. C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. 1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings and is included under work of related Division 15 and 16 Sections. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING 02110 - 3 No Text t Copyright 1992 AIA r i SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS MASTERSPEC 11/92 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY p�- A. This Section includes the following: ( 1. Preparing of subgrades for concrete ramp and steps. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, topsoil removal, and tree protection. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations and the reuse or disposal of materials removed. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. D. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. i r - EARTHWORK 02200 - 1 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/92 B. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the following: 1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on-site and borrow sources. 2. One optimum moisture -maximum density curve for each soil material. 3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each stratum tested. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide a minimum 48 -hours' notice to the Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient• approved soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT. EARTHWORK 02200 - 2 7 is t Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/92 D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required subgrade elevations regardless of the character of materials and obstructions encountered. 3.3 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.4 A. B. FILL Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. I. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below. 1. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material. 2. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material. EARTHWORK 02200 - 3 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/92 3.5MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet to compact to specified density. a. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. 3.6 COMPACTION A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure. 3.7 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. 2. 'Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to .required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 foot. 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.8 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material on prepared subgrades. Place base course material over subbases to pavements. EARTHWORK 02200'- 4 OW I Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/92 1. Compact subbase and base courses at Optimum moist ., ure content to required p and qu' grades, lines, cross sections and �. thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density. r 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL x A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each subgrade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements. PM 1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as r' applicable. 7 7 a. Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method according to ASTM D-2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017. b. When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. B. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. EARTHWORK 02200 - 5 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/92 C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.11 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material; including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK, 02200 - 6 7 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 2/93 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior portland cement concrete paving for the following: 1. Curbs and gutters. 2. Ramps. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading and subbase course. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, dry -shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect. C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more strignent than herein specified. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 l Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 1 2/93 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other acceptable panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of I 100 -foot or less radius. B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form -release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout, Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4, and as follows. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect. C. Water: Potable. D. Fiber Reinforcement: Synthetic fibers engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement ofconcrete slabs, complying with ASTM_C 1116, Type III. 2.3 ADMIXTURES A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: } 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: a. Air -rite or Amex 210; Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Air -Mix or Perma-Air; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Darex AEA or Daravair; W.R. Grace & Co. d. MB -VR or Micro -Air; Master Builders, Inc. e. Sealtight AEA; W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. Sika AER; Sika Corp. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: a. Chemtard; ChemMasters Corp. b. Type A Series Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Eucon WR -75; Euclid Chemical Co. d. WRDA; W.R. Grace & Co. e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed; Master Builders, Inc. f. Metco W.R.; Metalcrete Industries. g. Plastocrete 161; Sika Corp. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Clear Solvent -Borne Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A or B, wax free. B. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film -forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ,. one of the following: 1. Clear Solvent -Borne Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: a. Clear Cure; Anti -Hydro Co., Inc. b. Spartan -Cote; The Burke Co. c. All Resin; Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co. d. Sealco 309; Cormix Construction Chemicals. e. Day -Chem Cure and Seal; Dayton Superior Corp. f. Diamond Clear; Euclid Chemical Co. g. #64 Resin Cure -Clear; Lambert Corp. h. L&M Cure R; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. i. Masterkure; Master Builders, Inc. j. 3100 Series; W.R. Meadows, Inc. k. Seal N Kure; Metalcrete Industries. 1. Kure -N -Seal; Sonneborn-Chemrex. m. Horn Clear Seal; Tamms/A.C. Horn. r R PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING I 02520 - 3 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 2. Evaporation Control: a. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. c. E -Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. d. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. e. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS A. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type S. 1. Color: Yellow. 2. Color: Blue at Handicap Parking Symbols. B. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene butadiene. C. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit requirements. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Bonding Agent: a. Acrylic Bondcrete; The Burke Co. b. Strongbond; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. c. Day -Chem Ad Bond (J-40); Dayton Superior Corp. d. SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Daraweld C; W.R. Grace & Co. f. Everbond; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. g. Acryl-Set; Master Builders Inc. h. Intralok; W.R. Meadows, Inc. i. Acrylpave; Metalcrete Industries. j. Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Chemrex. k. Stonlock LB2; Stonhard, Inc. _ 1 Strong Bond; Symons Corp. 2. Epoxy Adhesive a. Burke Epoxy M.V.; The Burke Co. b. Spec -Bond 100; Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. c. Resi-Bond (J-58); Dayton Superior. d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Concresive Standard Liquid; Master Builders, Inc. f. Rezi-Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc. g. Metco Hi -Mod Epoxy; Metalcrete Industries. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 4 h. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod; Sika Corp. i. R-600 Series; Symons Corp. P' J. Epoxtite Binder 2390; Tamms/A.C. Horn, Inc. 2.6 CONCRETE MIX A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the Owner's field quality -control testing agency as the independent testing agency. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 -Day): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water -Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 4 inches. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1 -1/2 -inch maximum ° aggregate. r„ D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 1.5 lb per cu. f yd., unless manufacturer recommends otherwise. E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is ., above 90 deg F (32 deg C) , reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. d i PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5 f' Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.3 JOINTS A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless indicated otherwise. B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown.on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool. C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 -,6 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 1. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. r- ? D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 20 feet, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required. 3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. CONCRETE PLACEMENT E. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. F. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that are frozen. G. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete.is placed. H. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. I. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. J. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. is PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 7 1 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 K. L. M. N. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to. form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed. requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control_ temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperaturewillnot exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture. uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven floats, or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot -long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. ., 1. Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft ! bristle broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish. B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch. 3.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING e A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. 3.6 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Traffic Paint: Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15 -mil minimum wet film thickness. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9 Copyright 1993 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/93 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory. pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least14 days after .placement.- When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 10 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 f SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specificat.ion Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm): 1. For concrete unit masonry: As follows: a. f'm = 1500 psi. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. C. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory employed and paid by Contractor indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of the following proposed masonry materials with requirements indicated: 1. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. 2. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. 3. Masonry units. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 5/90. A. Single -Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. B. Single-Source.Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required. characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-WeatherConstruction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold -weather construction and the .following: 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. B. Hot -Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. UNIT MASONRY '04200 - 2 CY Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 I PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ^, A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section applicable to each material indicated. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below 7 applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required. POO 1. When install new wall or patching existing, use shapes and sizes equal to that removed. a. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. r 2. Provide Type I, moisture -controlled units. I 3. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. B. Hollow Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS �,.. A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. B. Ready -Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in thisarticle, combined with set -controlling admixtures to produce t a ready -mixed mortar complying with ASTM C 1142. �- C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. ` D. AggregateforMortar: ASTM C 144 for except ' p joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. r UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 F Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90; F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2.4 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article. B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615. 2. Grade 60. 2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). 3. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: a. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint reinforcement by one of the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur -O -Wal, Inc. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. UNIT..MASONRY 04200 - 4 z Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 PM f, 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. �-• 6. National Wire Products Industries. 7. Southern Construction Products, Inc. 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article. B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. 1. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch. C. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B3, as applicable to size and form indicated. D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur -O -Wal, Inc. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America. 6. National Wire Products Industries. 7. Southern Construction Products, Inc. 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: F UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification for job -mixed mortar and 'ASTM C 1142 for ready -mixed mortar, of types indicated below:' 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -lime. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. C. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. D. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of new masonry with existing masonry. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6- FMI Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/90 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS r-• A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less that nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Match existing pattern. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each Wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 -unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3 -unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly (if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built -In Work: As construction progresses, build -in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.' 1. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 2. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 7 i Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 3.6 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT 5/90 A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T° sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean.exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 8 Flo Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 1.3 8/90 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking. B. Related Sections: The following Sections requirements that relate to this Section: contain 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork specially fabricated for this Project. DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material certificates for dimensional lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use as well as design values approved by the Board of Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY 7 06100- 1 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 18/90' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference them with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian). 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory -marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece; or omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade and species: 1. "Standard" grade. 2. Any species graded under WWPA or WCLIB rules. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 Copyright 1990, AIA ii 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER MASTERSPEC 8/90 A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. C. Grade: "Standard" grade light -framing -size lumber of any species or board -size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/90 B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work., Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with N.F.P.A. "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Install framing members of size and spacing indicated. 3.4 STUD FRAMING A. General: Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Install single bottom plate and double top plates using 2 -inch -thick members, whose widths equal that of studs; except single top 'plate may be used'for non -load-bearing partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction. 1. For interior partitions and walls install 2 -inch by 4 -inch wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c. B. Construct corners and intersections with not less than 3 studs. Install miscellaneous blocking and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. For interior walls and partitions install 2 -inch by 4 - inch wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c C. Construct corners and intersections with not Tess than 3 studs. Install miscellaneous blocking and framing as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. D. Frame openings with multiple studs and. headers. Install nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 4 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 8/90 1. For nonbearing partitions, install double -jamb studs and headers not less than 4 inches deep for openings 3 feet and less in width, and not less than 6 inches deep for wider openings. 2. For load-bearing partitions, install double -jamb studs for openings 6 feet and less in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Install headers of depth shown, or if not shown, as recommended by N.F.P.A. "Manual for House Framing." END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 5 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 5/91 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the construction of new or patch of existing walls, partitions or millwork and will include the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim and rails. 2. Plywood paneling. 3. Hardboard paneling. 4. Plank paneling. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in this Section. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for back priming and finishing of finish carpentry. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of finish carpentry by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing finish carpentry items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer's and installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for finish carpentry during its storage and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Match existing material with regards to species, grade, color, texture and finish. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Match existing fastening system used. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. Provide finish carpentry with moisture content that is compatible with Project requirements. B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. C r FINISH CARPENTRY r i 06200 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with finish carpentry manufacturer's and installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for finish carpentry during its storage and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Match existing material with regards to species, grade, color, texture and finish. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Match existing fastening system used. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. Provide finish carpentry with moisture content that is compatible with Project requirements. B. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. C r FINISH CARPENTRY r i 06200 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 EXAMINATION Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated or finished, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/16 inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/8 inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 3. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems that may be in or adjacent to standing and running trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of trim and rails. C. Finish in accordance with specified requirements. D. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry. FINISH ,CARPENTRY 06200 3 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim and rails. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight -fitting joints with full -surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane back of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints if required. 1. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after drywall joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood prior to nailing or fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 PANELING A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall for best match of adjacent panels for paneling where grain character or color variations are noticeable. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Conceal fasteners to greatest extent practical. B. Hardboard Paneling: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Leave 1/4 -inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact. C. Plank Paneling: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Arrange in random -width pattern suggested by manufacturer, unless boards or planks are of uniform width. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall. Install with uniform joints with only tongue -and -groove joints or end -matched joints within each field of paneling. 1. Select and arrange panels on each wall for best match of adjacent panels for paneling where grain character or color variations are noticeable. Install with uniform tight joints between panels. FINISH CARPENTRY r c 06200 - 4 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC - 5/91 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 5 7 il Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 06402- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 2/89 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim and rails. 2. Wood cabinets (casework). 3. Laminate clad cabinets (plastic -covered casework). t 4. Cabinet tops (countertops). 5. Flush wood paneling. 6. Interior door frames (jambs). B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: �. 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view. 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this section. �., 3. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural woodwork standards. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK i 06402 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 C. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as otherwise — indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.6 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high pressure decorative -laminates which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 Copyright 1 989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high pressure decorative laminates of one of the �- following: 1. Formica Corp. 2. Laminart. 3. Micarta Div., Westinghouse Electric Corp. 4. Nevamar Corp. 5. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 6. Sterling Engineered Products, Inc. 1.7 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4 2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 3. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 5. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 1.8 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated or to match existing conditions. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/8 inch. 1.9 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR TRANSPARENT OR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 1.10 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT OR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A "Wood Cabinets." 1.11 INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES FOR TRANSPARENT OR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in V-011 for plumb and level .- (including tops)• and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly ~- attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where - prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from - maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners. r INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 �r I II �i Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips and by blind nailing on backup strips, splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing. Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated. H. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. ., I. Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 t' Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and -Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Interior joints in vertical" surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Tile control and expansion joints. b. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section "Tile" for sealing tile joints. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. B. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealant samples in 1/2 -inch -wide joints formed between two 6 -inch -long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 1 Copyright py ght 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attestin that their products comply with specification requirements r and are suitable for the use indicated. 6 E. Qualification data complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" article. Include list of completed projects with project names addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. r r F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. G. Product test reports for each type of joint sealants indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. H. Preconstruction field test reports indicating which products and joint preparation methods demonstrate acceptable adhesion to joint substrates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying progress of the Work. C. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: _ 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible,with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience., B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1. Match color at each existing location. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet. 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. B. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, latex joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Silicone -Emulsion Sealant: a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4 a. Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC' 5/91 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for: compliance, with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface.Cleaning of Joints: before installing joint recommendations of joint following requirements: B. Clean out joints immediately sealants to comply with sealant manufacturer and the 1. 'Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry,, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint_ substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond• do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALANTS 07901 5 Copyright 1991 AIA NIASTERSPEC 5/91 R"' 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS POO A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent �. requirements apply. B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and -after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07901 F 4 4 JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6 Copyright 1991 AIA JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7 d" Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 2/87 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY: .• A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors required include the following: 1. u Match Existing Doors. C. Shop -priming of flush wood doors is included in this section. D. Factory- finishin of flush g wood doors is included in this section. E. Factory-prefitting to frames and factor - remac 'Hing for hardware for wood doors is included in this section. F. Wood door frames and other woodwork in juxtaposition to flush wood doors are specified in Division -6 section "Architectural Woodwork". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of NWWDA quality standard. " FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1 08211 — 1 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 2/87 A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 A. 1.6 A. B. C. PROJECT CONDITIONS: Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the '`following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 "Moisture Content". WARRANTY: General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 7 Copyright 1987, AIA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: MASTERSPEC 2/87 A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: 2. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 3. Buell Door Company. 4. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Industries, Inc. 5. Chappell Door Company. 6. Doors, Incorporated. 7. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. 8. Gay Doors, Inc. 9. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co. 10. Graham Manufacturing Corp. 11. Ipik Door Co., Inc. 12. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 13. Weyerhauser Company. 14. Hollow Core Doors: 15. Cal -Wood Door Div., Timberland Industries Inc. 16. Glen -Mar Door Mfg. Co. 17. Ipik Door Co., Inc. 18. Weyerhauser Company. 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS: A. Solid of Hollow Core Doors for Transparent or Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Match existing face, grade, construction and finish. 2.3 FABRICATION: A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: 1. In sizes indicated for job -site fitting. a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. FLUSH WOOD DOORS i f '. 08211 - 3 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. B. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware where required for pairs of fire -rated doors. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces and finish as specified for associated doors. 1. Fixed Transom Panels: Fabricate fixed panels with solid lumber transom bottom rail and door top rail, both rabbeted as indicated, and factory -installed springbolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required. 1.' Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. E. Exterior Doors: Treat exterior doors at factory with water repellent after manufacturing has been completed. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard metal flashing at top of outswinging units. 2.4 PRIMING: A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division -9 section "Painting". B. Transparent Finish: Seal faces and edges of doors for transparent finish with stain (if required) and other required pretreatments and first coat of finish as specified in the _ following: 1. Division -9 section "Painting". FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 Copyright 1987 AIA r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: . MASTERSPEC 2/87 A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Hardware: For installation see Division -8 "Finish Hardware" section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. F. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division -9 section "Painting". FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5 Copyright 1987, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/87 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or `- operate freely. B. Finished "Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be withoutdamage' or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 6 ` Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/90- SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS r w� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work: 1. Exterior entrance doors. 2. Transoms. 3. Sidelights. _ 4. Frames for entrances. 5. Storefront -type framing system. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Tempered glass entrances are included in Division 8 Section "All -Glass Entrances." 2. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing." 3. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware." 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the specified temperature range. 1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C) ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1 r Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/90 without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress on glass, or other detrimental effects. C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward acting normal to the plane of the wall. D. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an airinfiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf. E. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. 2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including: a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. b. Elevations at 1/4 -inch scale. .c. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. e. Hardware mounting heights. f. Provisions for expansion and contraction. g. Glazing details. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 -'2 ro Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC r e 11/90 3. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening. 4. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project, and that have a -record of successful in-service performance. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components required without causing delay in progress of the Work. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING J A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging. B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from •-- uncured masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. 1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. F` ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3 i Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 1 11/90 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate` fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. 2. Faulty operation. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 1 years after the date of Substantial Completion. C.'' The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering entrance and storefront systems that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amarlite Architectural Products. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 3.PPG Industries. 4. United States Aluminum Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 4 7 Copyright 1990 AIA MASTERS PEC. 11/90 A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179 -inch (26 gage) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026 -inch -thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for I compatibility with other components. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum r" brackets and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. pop G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123. H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 5 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/90 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items otherthanthose indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer. B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 1.' Ball -Bearing Butts: 5 -knuckle, 2 -bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1. Provide 2 butts for doors 7 feet 6 inches or less; provide 3'butts for taller and heavier doors. 2.- Surface -Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with cover, for parallel -arm -type mounting installation. Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Include the following: 3. Door Stop: Floor- or wall -mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1. 4. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying into the building system. - 5. Panic Hardware: Rim -type, center latch bolt type panic exit device activated by a full -width crash bar. Comply with UL 305. 6. Pull Handles: Aluminum pull handles of style indicated. 7. Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard full -door -width single -bar push bar. 8. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors _ and clips, coordinated with pivots and floor -concealed closers. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. 1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6 r f r r i Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/90 provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. 2. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB II 451 framing system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary to support required loads. 1. Drawings and specifications are based upon the TRIFAB II 451 framing system as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. C. Stile -and -Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j -bolts. 1. Design: Provide 1-3/4 inch thick doors of design indicated. a. Medium stile (3-1/2 inch nominal width). 2. Drawings and specifications are based upon the Series 350 doors as manufactured by the Kawneer Company, Inc. 3. Lights: Provide glazed openings as indicated, with aluminum moldings and stops. Provide nonremovable stops on the exterior. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 7 Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 2. Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. 3. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish. 1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface. D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever, possible. H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 1. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 2.6 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by -"AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, film thicker than 0.7 mil with integral color or electrolytically deposited color) complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1. 1. Color: Clear Anodized, to match existing. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 8: Copyright 1990, AIA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION MASTERSPEC 11/90 A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch. 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch. 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. I. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. 4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 - 9 I Copyright 1990, AIA MASTERSPEC 1111/90 E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. G. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.4 A B CLEANING Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with _requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Institute protective 'measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08410 ALUMINUMENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410 10 r Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 SECTION 08710 — DOOR HARDWARE r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware {� specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data including manufacturerstechnical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - l Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. C. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire -rated -openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with related to final hardware schedule, and installation instructions with each item or identification include basic package. B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 F, C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is '^ satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly r„ to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Butts and Hinges a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Cal -Royal Products, Inc. c. Hager Hinge Co. d. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. e. McKinney Products Co. f. H. Soss & Company. g. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works. 2. Push/Pull Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc. c. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. d. Hager Hinge Co. e. Hiawatha, Inc. f. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 I^ Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 3. Overhead Closers: a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co. b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. c. Dorma Door Controls International. d. International Door Closers, Inc. e. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. f. Monarch Hardware & Mfg. Co., Div Newman Tonks, Inc. g. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc. h. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc. i. Sargent Manufacturing Company. j. Yale Security Inc. 4. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates: a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc. c. Corbin '& Russwin Architectural`Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp. d. Hager Hinge Co. e. Hiawatha, Inc. f. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company. g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company'(Trimco). 5. Door Stripping and Seals: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. National Guard Products, Inc. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Reese Enterprises, Inc. e. Sealeze Corp. f. Ultra Industries. g. Zero International, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. IProducts are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type - required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article."Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 r Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that. have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. t'^ 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide t only template -produced units. 4 L DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 r s Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For fire -rated wood doors install #12 x 1 -1/4 -inch, threaded -to -the -head steel wood screws. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated,`provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out -Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 2.5 PUSH/PULL UNITS A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single units. 2.6 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer"s` recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. 2. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. B. (ALTERNATE NO. 4) Access -Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. 1. Closers equal to: LCN CLOSERS," Princeton, IL a. 1/door 4914 EQUALIZER b. 1/door -4810 CLOSER (pneumatically powered) C. 1 936 INTERIOR ACTUATOR d. 1 936WP EXTERIOR ACTUATOR e. 50' 925 TUBING DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 IE Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 P• 2. Hardware Finishes: Match existing. C. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers. 2.7 DOOR TRIM UNITS A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self -tapping screws. B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height of protection plates. C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated. 1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage) - 2.8 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets• (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets)for color and texture. B. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized standard c. commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights- indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where �., cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work !" specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 r Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line- and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent` surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, REUSE EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE WHEN ADJUSTING DOORS. B.' Hardware Set No. 1: Restroom Cemetery Office Sheet A-15 6 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 x 4.5 US26D McKINNEY 1 EA CYLINDER PRIVATE 1OU65 LL US26D SARGENT 2 EA STOPS 1279T US26D TRIMCO 2 EA SILENCERS 1229A USP TRIMCO Hardware Set No. 2: Entry Cemetery Office Sheet A-15 2 EA CYLINDER'PRUVATE #41 US26D SARGENT DOORHARDWARE 08710 - 8 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 5/91 Hardware Set No. 3: Hobby Room Maxey Comm. Center Sheet A-25 6 EA BUTTS TA2714 4.5 x 4.5 US26D McKINNEY 2 EA CLOSER 4041 H ALUM LCN 2 EA PUSHPLATE 1001-11 US32D TRIMCO 2 EA PULLPLATE 1059-3 US32D TRIMCO 2 EA KICKPLATE 10 x 2" LDW US32D TRIMCO 2 EA STOPS 1279T US26D TRIMCO 2 EA SILENCERS 1229A USP TRIMCO Hardware Set No. 4: Men's Restroom Lou Stubbs rParty House Sheet'A-27 1 EA CYLINDER PRIVATE 10U65 LL US26D SARGENT Hardware Set No. 5: Men's Restroom Mahon Party House Sheet A-30 1 EA CYLINDER PRIVATE 10U65 LL US26D SARGENT END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -_9 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.l RELATED;DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Entrances. 2. Storefront construction. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. B. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions. C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on GLAZING 08800 - 1 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/91 [ glass -framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. C. Samples for verification purposes of 12 -inch -square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12 -inch -long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Product certificates signed by _ glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with - specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials r including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, E and edge blocks. G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. i GLAZING 08800 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/91 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. SIGMA Publications: TM -3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines" and TB -3001 "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI). D. Single -Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036)* type and class indicated. 2. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. E. Single -Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. GLAZING 08800 3 Copyright 1991 AIA i 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS r w MASTERSPEC A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in Product Data Sheets at end of this Section. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3 (glazing select). 1. Class 2 (tinted, heat -absorbing, and light -reducing) where indicated. 2. Class as indicated in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. GLAZING 08800 - 4 R— Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC B. Refer to Primary Tinted Float Glass Product Data Sheet for tint color and nominal performance characteristics of Class 2 uncoated tinted glass for monolithic glazing relative to visible light transmittance, U -values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance. 1. Gray: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible light transmittance of 41-43 percent and shading coefficient of 0.67-0.69 percent for 1/4" thick glass. C. Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light transmittance, U -values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fabrication Process: By vertical (tong -held) or horizontal (roller -hearth) process, at manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks. 2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Coated, Tinted, Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C (other coated glass), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat -absorbing and light -reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with kind, coating type, and performance characteristics complying with requirements specified under coated glass products. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering heat-treated glass products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following companies.' 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Ford Glass Division. 3. Guardian Industries Corp. 4. LOF Glass,Inc. 5. PPG Industries, Inc. 2.5 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled' units consisting of organically sealed lites of glassseparated by GLAZING' 08800 - 5 r Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/91 dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating r Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with ., the following requirements: _1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: F; a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. r GLAZING 08800 - 6 I 1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. 2. Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind t indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified ` and Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick and nominal 1/2 -inch dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated. 4. U -values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft. x deg F. 2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with ., the following requirements: _1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: F; a. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. r GLAZING 08800 - 6 I Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/91' 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1 AAMA 804.1 2. AAMA 806.1. 3. AAMA 807.1. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous'extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. GLAZING 08800 - 7 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/91 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent €' damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within C" openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. c' Rotate glass lites with flares orbevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, �-• unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. E 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. r. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion r^ of sealants, as determined by preconstruction ( sealant -substrate testing. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. I G GLAZING r 08800 - 8 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/91 C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.5 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them Immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. 'Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. -D., Remove and replace glass that'is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 08800 - 9 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 SECTION 09200 - LATH AND PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal lath and furring. 2. Portland cement plastering. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data consisting of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each product, including data showing compliance with the requirements. C. Match existing plaster texture and color. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum lath flat to prevent deformation. C. Handle gypsum lath to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect metal corner beads and trim from being bent or damaged. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application of plaster. - B. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), maintain.continuous uniform temperature of not less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) nor more than 80 deg F (26 deg C) for not less than l week prior to beginning plaster application, during its application, and until plaster is dry but for not less than one week after application is complete. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat from contacting plaster near heat source. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydration of plaster. Begin ventilation immediately after plaster is applied and continue until it sets. D. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects that might result from plastering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Metal Supports: a. Allied Structural Industries, Inc. b. American Studco, Inc c. Chapman Industries, Inc. d. Chicago Metallic Corp. e. Dale Industries, Inc. f. Dietrich Industries, Inc. g. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. h. Marino Industries. i. United States Gypsum Co. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 2 7 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 7 2. Expanded Metal Lath: a.. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO) b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. d. Western Metal Lath Co. 3. Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. Keene Corp. d. MM Systems Corp. e. Plastic Components, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Co. g. Western Metal Lath Co. 4. Gypsum Lath and Plasters: a. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. b. United States Gypsum Co. r 2.2 STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS (TRACKS) 7 A. Non -Load (Axial) - Bearing Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645 and complying with following requirements for minimum thickness of i' base metal (uncoated) and other characteristics: 1. Stud Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Stud Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. B. Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Studs and Runners: ASTM C 955 and complying with the following requirements for quality, grade, and finish of steel sheet, design thickness of base metal (uncoated), and other dimensional characteristics: PM 1. Metal Quality: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 446, Coating Designation G 60, for -- grades indicated below: a. Grade A (33,000 psi yield point) for design ^ thicknesses of 0.0359 inch or less. 2. Stud Thickness: 0.0359 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Stud Flange Width: 1-3/8 inches. ^ 4. Stud Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Stud Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches. 6. Stud Lip Depth: 1/2 inch. 7. Stud Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. LATH AND PLASTER t. 09200 - 3 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 2.3 LATH A. Expanded Metal Lath: Fabricate expanded metal lath from uncoated or zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet to produce lath complying with ASTM C 847 for type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath. 1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Self -furring. 1) Weight: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. 2.4 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR GYPSUM PLASTER A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 841; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Corner Beads: Type as indicated below, fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. 1. Type: Small nose with expanded flanges, unless otherwise indicated. 2.Type: Small nose with perforated flanges, for use on curved corners. 3. Type: Small nose with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening -rib, for use on columns and finishing masonry corners. 4. Type: Bull nose, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges, at locations indicated. C. Strip Reinforcement: Smooth -edge strips of expanded metal lath fabricated from uncoated or zinc -coated (galvanized) steel sheet, with uncoated steel painted after fabrication; in the following forms: 1. Cornerite: Strips prebent lengthwise in center for internal plaster angles not otherwise reinforced by metal lath lapped or carried around. 2. Stripite: Flat strips for reinforcing joints in gypsum lath, nonmetallic bases, and between dissimilar plaster bases. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 4 r i r i� r Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 D. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with short or expanded flanges to suit kinds of plaster bases indicated; of the following material: 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. 2. Material: Aluminum, coated with clear plastic. 3. Material: Any material indicated above. E. Curved Casing Beads: Square -edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated. F. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. 2. Material: Aluminum, coated with clear plastic. 3. One -Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges. 4. Two -Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to provide slip -joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 inch to 5/8 inch. a. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. 2.5 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large -mesh diamond mesh lath fabricated from zinc -alloy or welded wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch-diameter.zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. C. Metal Corner Beads: Small nose corner beads fabricated from zinc alloy, with expanded flanges of large. -mesh diamond lath to allow full encasement by plaster. D. Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges and removable protective tape, of the following material: 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. 2. Material: Zinc alloy. 3. Material: Aluminum, coated with clear plastic. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 5 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 E. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: — 1. Material: Zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. 2. Material: Zinc alloy. 3. Material: Aluminum, coated with clear plastic. -- 4. One -Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration, with expanded flanges. 5. Two -Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges — formed to provide slip -joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 inch to 5/8 inch. 2.6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base Coat Cements: Type as indicated below: — 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II. B. Finish Coat Cement: Type as indicated below: 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, white. C. Factory -Prepared Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard product requiring addition of water only; white unless otherwise indicated. — 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco manufactured by United States Gypsum Co. D. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: 'ASTM C 897. E. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 and as indicated below. 1. Manufactured or natural sand, in color required to match _ existing. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 6 I M Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 70 l 2.8 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for portland cement plaster base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. 71 B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's directions but do not to exceed 2 lbs. per cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. 2. Three -Coat Work Over Metal Lath: Base coats as indicated below: a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. 3. Three -Coat Work Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Base coat as indicated below: a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. C. Factory -Prepared Portland Cement Finish Coats: Add water only; comply with finish coat manufacturer's directions. 2.9 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 7 Copyright 1989, AIA , MASTERSPEC PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING, GENERAL 11/89 A. Portland Cement Plaster Lathing and Furring Installation Standard:- Install lathing and furring materials indicated for portland cement plaster to comply with ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the Work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings,'. and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum plaster manufacturer or, if not available, of 'Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip- or cushion - type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL STUD WALL/PARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General: Install components for steel stud wall/partition support systems to comply with directions of steel stud manufacturer for applications " indicated and with the following: 1. For non -load (axial) -bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C 754. 2. For load-bearing (axial and transverse) stud systems, comply with ASTM C 1007 and as indicated. B. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of ML/SFA "Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" applicable to each installation condition and type of metal stud system indicated. LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 8 I,. Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 C. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Gypsum Lath: -Space studs as follows: 1. Match existing. D. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL METAL FURRING u A. Metal Furring to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements *� of ML/SFA "Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring" applicable to each installation condition indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. B. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster: Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location: 1. Corner Reinforcement: Install at external corners. 2. Corner Bead: Install at external corners. 3. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise indicated. 4. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect. a. where an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. c. For Portland Cement Plaster: Where, in surfaces of ceilings and walls, distances between and areas within control joints exceed, respectively, the following measurements: 1) 10 feet in either direction and 100 sq. ft. i' LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 9 i Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound or agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards for conditioning of monolithic surfaces. — B. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10'-0" from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10'-0" straightedge placed at any location on surface. C. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work so,that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. D. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal. E. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards. r- 3.6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION A. Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply portland cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. - B. Number of Coats: Apply portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Use three -coat work over the following plaster bases: a. Metal lath. b. Concrete.unit masonry. 2. Finish Coat: Floated finish unless otherwise indicated; match Architect's sample for texture and color. C. Moist -cure portland cement plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including recommendations for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." LATH AND PLASTER _ 09200 - 10 Copyright 1989 , AIA MASTERSPEC 11/89 i 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to the substrate has failed. B. Sand smooth -troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and arrises. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensure plaster work's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09200 "' LATH AND PLASTER 09200 - 11 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. The patching and matching of the following. a. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. b. Glazed ceramic mosaic tile._ c. Glazed wall tile. d. Stone thresholds at toilet doors. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removal of existing tile. 2. Division 9 Section "Lath and Plaster" for portland cement scratch coat over metal lath on wall surfaces. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for water-resistant gypsum backing board installed as part of gypsum wallboard systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. TILE 09300 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 r D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed -as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. �-• 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units i' equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. TILE j c 09300 — 2 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal -Tile Corp. c. Mid -State Tile Co. d. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc. f. United States Ceramic Tile Co. g. Villeroy & Boch (U.S.A.) Inc. h. Wenczel Tile Co. i. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Co. 2. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Dal -Tile Corp. c. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc. e. United States Ceramic Tile Co. f. Villeroy & Boch (U.S.A.) Inc. g. Wenczel Tile Co. 3. Glazed Wall Tile: a. American Marrazzi Tile, Inc. b. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. c. Buchtal Corp. USA d. Dal -Tile Corp. e. International American Ceramics/Laufen f. Mid -State Tile Co. g. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc. i. United States Ceramic Tile Co. j. Villeroy & Boch '(U.S.A.) Inc. k. Wenczel Tile Co. of Florida 4. Organic Adhesives, Type I: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. TILE 09300 - 3 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC d. Custom Building Products e. C -Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. �., i. Mapei Corp. J. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 5. Acrylic Emulsions for Latex -Portland Cement Grouts: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. C -Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. i. Mapei Corp. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. I. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 2/89 A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 9 1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements �.., unless otherwise indicated. t B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. Match existing tile. 2. Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard designations for these characteristics.' 3. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. TILE 09300 - 4 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 4. Where tile is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back- or edge -mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer -- specifies that this type of mounting is suitable for these kinds of uses and has been successfully used on other projects. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS _ MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS. A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat tile. B. Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat _ tile. C. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile. D. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining and existing flat tile and to comply with following requirements: — 2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS A. General: Provide stone that is uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated or required to .provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining _ finished floor surfaces. B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where exposed to foot traffic, a minimum hardness of10per ASTM C 241. 1. Provide white, honed marble complying with MIA Group "A" .requirements for soundness. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard. TILE 09300 - 5 Im Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 2. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at -job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer. �• a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.61 color as indicated, composition as follows: 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. b. Dry Grout Mixture: An on -the -job -mixture of white or gray portland cement and white or colored fine graded aggregate that complies with latex additive manufacturer's requirements. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to -comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. TILE 09300 - 6 I Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory — conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Match existing. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet"'is not apparent in finished work. TILE 09300 - 7 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 r F. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: r- 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement .� grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.4 h a 3':. 5 G. At showers, tubs and similar wet areas, install water- resistant gypsum backer board and treat joints to comply with manufacturer's instructions for type of application indicated. FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated• below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types: I. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1 a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or dust coat on plastic bed. 1) Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F112 (bonded). c. Concrete Subfloors, Interior, Waterproofing Membrane: TCA F121. d. Grout: Latex-portland cement. B. Stone Thresholds Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements indicated below for setting -bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types: I. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A108.4. a. Gypsum Board, Interior: TCA W242. b. Bathtub Walls, Gypsum Board: TCA B413. c. Shower Receptor, Wood or Metal Studs: TCA B416. d. Grout: Latex-portland cement. 09300 - 8 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2/89 2. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. a. Masonry, Interior: TCA W202. b. 'Wood or Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243. c. Cementitious Backer Units, Interior: TCA W244. d. Shower Receptors, Water-Resistant Gypsum Backer Board: TCA B415. e. Grout: Latex-portland_cement. - 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise .,defective tile work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09300 TILE 09300 - 9 r r Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 8/92 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 3. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing and furring members. 4. Gypsum board bonded adhesively to interior concrete and masonry substrates. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for the following: a. Wood framing and furring. 2. Division 9 Section "Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. 1.3 ' DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA -505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. r GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where fire -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA -600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single -Source Responsibility for SteelFraming: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer. C. Single -Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. D. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from -weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 2 y r - F Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C) . For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. c. Dale Industries, Inc. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. Marino Industries Corp. f. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. g. Unimast Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. d. United States Gypsum Co. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3 r- Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS 8/92 A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: a. Maximum Deflection: M/120 at 5 ibf per sq. ft. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 -inch -wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Depth: 2-1/2 inches where indicated. C. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: Provide 5/8 inch gypsum board or, if not otherwise indicated, in either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses to match existing. Comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support spacing indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X, unless noted otherwise. 3. Type: Sag -resistant type for ceiling surfaces. 4. Edges: Tapered. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch or match existing. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 4 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 r 6. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated: a. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board, Domtar Gypsum. b. Firestop Type C, Georgia-Pacific Corp. c. Fire -Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. d. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States Gypsum Co. e. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core, United States Gypsum Co. C. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Type X where required for fire -resistive -rated assemblies. "^ 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch or match existing. Ia 4. Thickness: 1/2 inch if matching existing. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and t requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference: to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. c. L -bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L -bead where indicated. d. U -bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U -bead where indicated. e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use pressure -sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass -fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory -packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory -mixed product. 2. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per ASTM E 90. 2. Product has flame -spread and smoke -developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints -to reduce transmission of airborne sound. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant: a. AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6 Copyright 1992 AIA g MASTERSPEC 8/92 b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, United States Gypsum Co. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. BA -98, Pecora Corp. b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc. 2.8 TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCTS A. Primer: Of type recommended by texture finish manufacturer. B. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: Factory -packaged proprietary powder product formulated with Polystyrene aggregates for mixing with water at Project site to produce the texture indicated below by spray application, with flame -spread and smoke -developed ratings of not more than 25 per ASTM E 84: 1. Match existing texture finish. C. Aggregate Finish: Factory -packaged proprietary drying -type powder product formulated with aggregate for mixing with water at Project site for spray application to produce texture indicated below: 1. Match existing finish. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7 r f 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the €+^ following applications: E. a 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 ,., inch thick. 2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2.8 TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCTS A. Primer: Of type recommended by texture finish manufacturer. B. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: Factory -packaged proprietary powder product formulated with Polystyrene aggregates for mixing with water at Project site to produce the texture indicated below by spray application, with flame -spread and smoke -developed ratings of not more than 25 per ASTM E 84: 1. Match existing texture finish. C. Aggregate Finish: Factory -packaged proprietary drying -type powder product formulated with aggregate for mixing with water at Project site for spray application to produce texture indicated below: 1. Match existing finish. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7 r f Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 D. Acoustical Finish: Factory -packaged proprietary chemical -hardening powder product formulated for mixing with water at Project site for spray application to produce a 1/2 -inch -thick, evenly textured, white -colored finish with a flame -spread rating of 10 and a smoke -developed rating of 25 per ASTM E 84 and an NRC of 0.50 per ASTM C 423. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: a. Gyproc Ceiling Texture Spray, Domtar Gypsum. b. G -P Ceiling Texture --Polystyrene, Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. Perfect Spray Coarse, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. d. Perfect Spray Medium, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. e. IMPERIAL QT Spray Texture Finish (F -Fine), United States Gypsum Co. f. IMPERIAL QT Spray Texture Finish (P -Medium), United States Gypsum Co. g. IMPERIAL QT Spray Texture Finish (PC -Coarse), United States Gypsum Co. h. IMPERIAL QT Spray Texture Finish (PS United Coarse), United States Gypsum Co. 2. Aggregate Finish: a. G -P Ceiling Texture --Vermiculite, Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. USG Spray Texture Finish, United States Gypsum Co. 3. Acoustical Finish: a'. USG Acoustical Finish, United States Gypsum Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast -in -anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing l to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at floor. a. Provide slip- or cushioned -type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and '., furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9 i Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For STC -rated and fire -resistive -rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated or equal to existing conditions but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading requirements specified: 1. Single -Layer Construction: Space studs at 16 inches O.C. E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA -219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, in same manner as required for -door openings Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ' 09255 10 7 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPE C 8/92 " B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to g minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field -cut edges abut field -cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 11 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4 -to -1/2 -inch -wide joints to install. sealant. J. Isolate perimeter of. non -load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4 -inch -to -1/2 -inch -wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. Where STC -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.. L. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing, standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel application is required for fire -resistive -rated assemblies. Use maximum -length panels to minimize end joints. B. Wall Tile Substrates: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes,. comply with the following: 1. Install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels at showers, tubs, and where indicated. 2. Install.gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 12 f Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 C. Acoustical Tile Base: Where gypsum panels form the base for adhesively applied acoustical tile, install gypsum wallboard panels. D. Single -Layer g yer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. 1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L -bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. D. Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to ASTM C 840, and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations ;fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 13 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA -214. 1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistive -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 2. Level 2 where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile where matching existing. 3. Level 3 for gypsum board surfaces where matching existing. 4. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces where matching existing. 5. Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces -where matching .existing. E. For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Use the following joint compound combination: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or taping compound. 2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or topping compound. F. Where level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound combination specified for level 4 plus a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Use joint compound specified for the finish (third coat) or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated. G. Where level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compounds specified for first and second coat in addition to embedding coat. H. Where level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat. I. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat. J. Base for Acoustical Tile: Where gypsum board is indicated as a base for adhesively applied acoustical tile, install tape and a two -coat compound treatment, without sanding. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 14 7 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/92 K. Finish water-resistant gypsum backing board forming base for ceramic tile to comply with ASTM C 840 and board r^ manufacturer's directions for treatment of joints behind I tile. 3.9 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer only to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated to receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray equipment acceptable to texture finish manufacturer, produce a uniform texture matching approved field samples and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 15 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 5/89 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division l Specification — Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed in existing and altered exposed suspension systems. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile" for mineral -base acoustical tile ceilings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project. B. Fire -Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire - performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. 2. Fire -Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory," for types of assemblies in which acoustical ceilings function as a fire- protective membrane and tested per ASTM E 119. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 a. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for rated assembly. C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any) . 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS i 09511 - 2 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL 5/89 A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard units of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Colors, Textures and Patterns: Match existing. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. .Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with — applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Finishes and Colors: Match existing. C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 11 Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, — soft temper. 1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger designload(ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct -Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch diameter (12 gage) -- E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 r Copyright 1989, AIA 3.2 PREPARATION MASTERSPEC 5/89 A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half -width units at borders and comply with reflected ceiling plans. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA 'Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. — C. Install edge moldings of type that match existing at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. J. Screw -attach moldings to substrate at'intervals not over 16 inches o. c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-011. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. D. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Install hold-down clips in areas that already have them and in areas where required by governing regulations or for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor _ finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.5 EXISTING CEILINGS A. coordinate installation of Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical work located above existing suspended acoustical ceiling systems. Remove ceiling systems as required, minimizing extent of existing ceiling to be disturbed. B. At completion of work by other trades, replace ceiling system and thermal insulation (if any). C. Soiled, smudged, finger -printed, chipped edges or broken ceiling panels scratched and bent suspension system members will be grounds for rejection. Replace damaged components to _ match existing. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 D. If questionable areas of ceiling _exist, notify Owner before commencing any work. Document by photographs, in the presence of the Owner, all areas that may be of consequence at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 SECTION 09512 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General _ and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Acoustical tile ceilings, adhered to substrate. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for mineral -base acoustical panel ceilings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 1 r� Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 r s C. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with C^ resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system components, and partition system. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, .and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS C' I Furnish five full-size units. 09512 - 2 Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited'`to the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL - A. Colors, Textures and Patterns: Provide products to match existing acoustical tile. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Adhesive: ASTM,D 1779, type as recommended by tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0 - 25 flame spread. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.5 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to - balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of•less-than-half -width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 2.6 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 3 r r r Copyright 1989, AIA MASTERSPEC 5/89 B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units (if any) in manner that matches existing. C. Install acoustical tile by cementing to substrate, using amount of adhesive and procedure recommended by tile manufacturer including removal of loose dust from backs of tiles by brushing and then priming them with thin coat of adhesive. Install splines in joints between tiles and level to 1/8 inch in 12'-011 tolerance. Maintain tight butt joints, aligned both directions, and coordinated with ceiling fixtures. Scribe and cut tile to fit accurately at ceiling edges and penetrations. 2.7 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09512 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 09512 - 4 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09660 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 -'GENERAL 8/91 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:' 1. -Homogenous (solid) vinyl floor tile. 2. Vinyl composition floor tile. B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). B. Samples in the event the existing flooring cannot be matched in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor tile indicated to be matched. C. Samples for verification purposes in full-size tiles of each different color and pattern of resilient floor tile specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. E. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 1 r� C Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 r C 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and of the Work. physical properties without delaying progress 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to Project site �., in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names. of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the �. weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Move tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at r, least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install tiles until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs are sufficiently prepared to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. r" RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, resilient floor tiles that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 RESILIENT TILE A. Homogenous (Solid) Vinyl Tile: Products complying with FS SS -T-312, Type III, and with requirements specified in Homogenous (Solid) Vinyl Floor Tile Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. B. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated), and with requirements specified in Vinyl Composition Floor Tile Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit resilient` floor tile products and substrate conditions indicated. D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with tile manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 3 7 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSP EC 8/91 B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer. 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive i tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a Poll terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty vy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before the installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile installation included in j Project. off RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 4 h Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Match tile pattern. D. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished tile floor, Install tile before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile installation. I. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing tile installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes .using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop tile to remove black marks and soil. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 5 7 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. I. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09660 - 6 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09666 -.SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 8/91 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings that matches existing. B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product matched. 1. Certification by floor covering manufacturer that products supplied for installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). C. Samples in the event existing flooring cannot be matched in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of sheet vinyl floor coverings showing full range of colors and patterns available for each different product indicated. D. Samples for verification purposes in form of 6 -inch by 9 -inch sections of each different color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering product specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. E. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 1 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 F. Installer certificates signed by floor covering manufacturer certifying that Installers comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article. G. Maintenance data for sheet vinyl floor coverings, to include in the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage Installer that is certified by floor covering manufacturer as competent in the technique for heat -welding seams. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) . B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic while installing sheet vinyl floor covering. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 2 r 4 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 17 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by floor covering manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, sheet vinyl floor coverings that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS A. Type I Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type I, except for backing requirements, and with requirements specified in Type I Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. B. Type I Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings with Backing: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type I, and with requirements specified in Type I Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. C. Type II Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type II, except for backing requirements, and with requirements specified in Type II Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. D. Type II Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings with Backing: Products complying with ASTM F 1303, Type II, and with requirements specified in Type II Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 3 low f Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 7- «: B. Trowelable Underla ants ym and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering products and substrate conditions indicated. D. Seam Sealer: Formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for products indicated. .. E. Rod for Heat -Welding Seams: Product of floor covering manufacturer in color complying with the following requirement. 1. Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering. F. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of sheet vinyl floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION r• A. General: Examine areas where installation of sheet vinyl floor coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with floor covering manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply withASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. i SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 4 E Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor covering manufacturer's direction to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, 'or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by sheet vinyl floor coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's installation instructions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in Project. B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction. 2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. C. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished floor covering, install floor covering before these items are installed. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 5 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 i' D. Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture, including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. E. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in I^ place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on 4 finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates by method approved by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 2. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. H. Heat -weld seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings where this seaming method is indicated. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce a surface flush with adjoining sheets. I. Chemically bond seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings where this seaming method is indicated. Prepare seams and apply seam sealers to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps or overlaps. J. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cove sheet vinyl floor coverings up vertical surfaces to form integral base of height indicated matching existing with top edge butted against and covered by cap molding. K. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat -bladed instrument. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet vinyl floor coverings: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by floor covering manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 6 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 3. Do not wash floor until• after period recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop floor to remove black marks and sail. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and -fixtures iduring remainder. of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by floor covering manufacturer. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09666 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 7 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC SECTION 09678 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 8/91 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. `' B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring." 2. Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering." t• 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples in the event the existing base cannot be matched for selection purposes of manufacturer,'s standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from each type of product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available. D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer,'s standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches long, of each different color and pattern of product specified. E. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product complies with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with '^ resources to provide products of consistent quality in RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 1 k Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products specified in this Section. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with. other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. AvailableProducts: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, those specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE - MATCH EXISTING A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS -W-40, Type I, and requirements specified in the Rubber Wall Base Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. B. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS -W-40, Type II, and requirements specified in the Vinyl Wall Base Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in Rubber Accessory Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. B. Vinyl Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in Vinyl Accessory Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. 2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES r 09678 - 3 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for -moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products.specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 4 C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. D. Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. 1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient accessories that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Use commercially available metal, cross-linked, acrylic product acceptable to resilient accessory manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. END OF SECTION 09678 t RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 5 r Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 2. Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces. 3. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting inverted an V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 4. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. D. Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. 1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient accessories that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. a. Use commercially available metal, cross-linked, acrylic product acceptable to resilient accessory manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. END OF SECTION 09678 t RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678 - 5 r Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC - 2/92 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. B. "Painting" consists of touching -up the painted walls by matching the existing at locations where toilet fixtures, accessories and/or partitions were raised, lowered, moved or removed or walls were moved to meet handicap accessibility requirements. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory -finished components: a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic materials c. Elevator entrance'doors and frames. d. Elevator equipment. e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. f. Light fixtures. g. Switchgear. h. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. PAINTING 09900 1 7 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 e. Duct shafts. f. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment, such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. ' PAINTING (_j 09900 - 2 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied,with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4 -inch -square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 -inch -square samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch samples of natural. and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4 -inch -square samples of flat metal and two 8 -inch -long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. PAINTING 09900 - 3 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg 4. Contents by volume, for, pigment and vehicle B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of constituents. r• 5. Thinning instructions. between 45 deg F (7 deg C) 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. or mist; or when the B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in relative humidity exceeds less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in �^ a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. or wet surfaces. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and ,. orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting _ from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Fuller O'Brien (Fuller). 3. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 4. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). PAINTING 09900 - 4 7"! A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) 85 percent; or at temperatures above the dew to point; or damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Fuller O'Brien (Fuller). 3. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 4. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). PAINTING 09900 - 4 7"! Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 5. PPG Industries,_Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 6. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S -W). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish 'coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best -quality trade sale paint materialof the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to.designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the existing areas to be painted or touched -up. 2.3. MASONRY.BLOCK FILLER A. Filler Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated, latex -type concrete masonry block fillers that are compatible with the finish materials indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, block fillers that may incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. High -Performance Latex Block Filler: a. Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler. b. Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. c. Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. d. Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler.#173. e. PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. f. P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler. g. S -W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. PAINTING 09900 - 5 FCopyright 1992 AIA I^ §. 2.4 PRIMERS r MASTERSPEC 2/92 A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, prime coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Concrete and Masonry Primers: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. a. Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier. b. Fuller: 202 -XX Interior - Exterior Acrylic Latex Wall Paint. c. Glidden: 5300 Ultra -Hide Flat Wall Paint. d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Flat B30W200. 2. New Plaster Primers: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. a. Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier. b. Fuller: Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. c. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer Sealer. d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. g. S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. 3. Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. a. Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. b. Fuller: Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. c. Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. d. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. e. PPG: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. f. P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. PAINTING 09900 - 6 7 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92' 2.5 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated undercoat materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. B. Available- Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, undercoat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 51701 Wonder -Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer Sealer & Vapor Barrier. b. Fuller: 220-06 Interior Alkyd Wall Primer Sealer. c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: E6 Enamel Undercoater. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. 2. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e.: PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel B34W200. 3. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. g. S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. PAINTING 09900 - 7 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2 lool 4. 5. 6. 7. PAINTING 09900 - 8 Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Enamel. d Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. g. S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. g• S -W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready -mixed enamel. a. Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. b. Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. c. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Alkyd Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. e. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. f. P & L: Interior Trim Primer. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. PAINTING 09900 - 8 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish •Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated finish -coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Interior, Flat, Latex -Based Paint: .Ready -mixed, latex -based paint for a flat finish. a. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. b. Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. c. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. d. Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. e. PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. g. S -W: Classic 99 Wall and .Trim Paint A27W10. 2. Interior, Flat, Odorless, Alkyd Paint: Ready -mixed, interior, flat, low -odor, alkyd enamel. a. Devoe: 21XX Velour Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. b. Fuller: 101XX Liquid Velvet Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. c. Glidden: _ 5700 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Sani-Flat #204. e. PPG: 6-50 Series Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. f. P & L: Lyt-All Flowing Flat. g. S -W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint B32W101. 3. Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low -odor, alkyd enamel. a. Devoe: - 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. b. Fuller: 110XX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. c. Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. d. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. e. PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. f. P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. g. S -W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 -Series. PAINTING 09900 - 9 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC r �. 4. Interior, Flat, Latex -Based Paint: latex -based paint. 2/92 Ready -mixed, 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD -FINISHING MATERIALS A. Wood -Finishing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated, wood -finishing materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, -wood-finishing materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Varnish -Type Surface Sealer: PAINTING a. Devoe: 1502 Wonder Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex House Paint Primer. b. Glidden: 3651 Spred House Paint Prime Coat. c. PPG: 77-1 Rez Sealer -Primer. d. P & L: Varmor Penetrating Sealer. e. S -W: Chek Gard Primer B42W10. 09900 10 a. Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. b. Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. c. Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. d. Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. e. PPG: 50-35 Latex Ceiling Paint. f. P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. g. S -W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. 5. Exterior, Gloss, Alkyd Enamel: a. Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd -Urethane Gloss Enamel. b. Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. c. Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. d. Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. e. PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. f. P & L: Effecto Enamel. g. S -W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD -FINISHING MATERIALS A. Wood -Finishing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory -formulated, wood -finishing materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, -wood-finishing materials that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Varnish -Type Surface Sealer: PAINTING a. Devoe: 1502 Wonder Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex House Paint Primer. b. Glidden: 3651 Spred House Paint Prime Coat. c. PPG: 77-1 Rez Sealer -Primer. d. P & L: Varmor Penetrating Sealer. e. S -W: Chek Gard Primer B42W10. 09900 10 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 2. Oil -Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow -penetrating, _ oil -type wood stain. a. Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. b. Fuller: 640 -XX Pen -Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain. c. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. d. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain. e. PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. f. P & L: - S -Series Tonetic Wood Stain. g. S -W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. 3. Cut Shellac: Quick -drying, rosin -free, clear, general-purpose shellac varnish. a. Devoe: - 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. b. Fuller: No recommendation. c. Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. d. Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. e. PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. f. P & L: No recommendation. g. S -W: ProMar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. 4. Paste Wood Filler: Solvent -based, air -drying, paste -type wood filler. a. Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler. b. Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler. c. Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. d. Moore: -' Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. e. PPG: (none required) f. P & L: No recommendation. g. S -W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. 5. Oil Rubbing Varnish: Clear, oil -type, rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or natural -finished woodwork: a. Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. b. Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear - Polyurethane Satin Finish. c. Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. d. Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. e. PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. f. P & L: Clear Finish Gloss. g. S -W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. PAINTING 09900 - 11 r Copyright 1992 AIA i MASTERSPEC 2/92 D. Paste Wax: Provide paste wax as recommended by the coating manufacturer for use on interior stained and natural -finished woodwork. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. PAINTING 09900 - 12 7 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by .the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,_ mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or,plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. D. Materials Preparation: _Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. PAINTIDJG_ 09900: - 13 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 7 E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same �.. material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are to match existing. �. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, r receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers 4 for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. �., 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. S. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. v 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. n PAINTING 09900 - 14 i Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch-up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or,lose adhesion. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime -coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. H. Pigmented (opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. -Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. PAINTING- 09900 15 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touchup and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated to match existing. B. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two finish coats over filled surface. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 2) Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. 3) Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 7, PAINTING 7 09900 - 16 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 5) PPG:: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. 6) P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler. 7) S -W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin. Latex Wall -Paint. 4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. 2. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish:Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler. 1) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 2) Fuller: 280-00 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler. 3) Glidden: 5317 Ultra -Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler. 4) Moore: Moorcraft Interior & Exterior Block Filler #173. 5) PPG: 6-7 Latex Masonry Block Filler. 6) P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Block Filler., 7) S -W: Heavy -Duty Block Filler B42W46. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. _- 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer. PAINTING - 09900 - 17' PAINTING 09900 - 18 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 1 7) S -W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. � c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. ! ! 1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. rC. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. r" 1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. 2) Fuller: Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 6) P & L: Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 7) S -W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200. b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall ►^` Paint. 4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex ,.. Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. PAINTING 09900 - 18 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 2. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: White, interior, latex -based primer. 1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder -Tones Latex Primer and Sealer. 2) Fullers Pro -Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. 6) P & Ls Latex Wall Primer Z30001. 7) S -W: Pro -Mar 200 Latex Wall PrimerB28W200. b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. -3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. D. Plaster: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.' 2) Fuller: Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer Sealer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. PAINTING' 09900 19 r Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 PAINTING 09900 - 20 b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2) Fuller: 602XX Liquid Velvet Latex Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 3400 Spred Satin Latex Wall Paint. 4) Moore: Regal Wall Satin #215. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Wall and Trim Paint A27W10. 2. Odorless Lusterless (Flat) Latex Finish: Two coats. a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2) Fuller: Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer Sealer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. b. Finish Coat: Interior, flat, odorless, alkyd paint. 1) Devoe: 21XX Velour Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. 2) Fuller: 101XX Liquid Velvet Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. 3) Glidden: 5700 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Flat Wall Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Sani-Flat #204. 5) PPG: 6-50 Series Speedhide Alkyd Flat Wall Paint. 6) P & L: Lyt-All Flowing Flat. 7) S -W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Flat Wall Paint B32W101. 3. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. PAINTING 09900 - 20 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 2) Fuller: Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer Sealer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. 5) PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semi -Gloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: - Interior Trim Primer. 7) S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. c. Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. 4. Full -Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex -based paint. 1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder -Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint. 2) Fuller: Interior Latex Enamel Undercoater. . 3) Glidden: 5019 PVA Primer Sealer. 4) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal #201. PAINTING 09900 21 r r Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Copyright 1992 AIA 4) MASTERSPEC 2/92 5) PPG: 6) P & L: 7) 5 PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. !^ 6) P & L: Vapex Latex Flat Wall Finish. 7) S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. �.. b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. 6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7) S -W: Wall and Wood Primer B49W2. �- c. Finish Coat:, Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4) Moore: Impervo High -Gloss Enamel #133. 5) PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. r 6) P & L: Effecto Enamel. I 7) S -W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. E. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats. a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Devoe: 2) Fuller: 3) Glidden: 4) Moore: 5) PPG: 6) P & L: 7) S -W: 17, 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater. Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. Interior Trim Primer. Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. PAINTING 09900 - 22 4 r Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel. 1) Devoe: 26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: -11OXX Fullerglo Alkyd Semigloss _- Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel. 4) Moore: _ Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235. 5) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. -- 6) P & L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel. 7) S -W: Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series. _ 2. Full -Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats. a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat. 1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. -- 2) Fuller: 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat. 3) Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater. _ 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217. 5) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. -' 6) P & L: Interior Trim Primer. 7) S -W: Pro -Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200. -- b. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel. 1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. 2) Fuller: 312XX EPA Compliant Heavy Duty Enamel. '- 3) Glidden: 4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel. 4 M Im -Y,-- High -Gloss Enamel #133. %0%0 p 5) PPG: 54 Line Quick -Dry Enamel. 6) P & L: Effecto Enamel. 7) S -W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. F. Stained Woodwork: 1. Stained -Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open -grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. PAINTING 09900 - 23 F Copyright 1992 AI A 11 r -R 19 MASTERSPEC 2/92 a. Stain Coat: Oil -type interior wood stain. 1) Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. 2) Fuller: 640 -XX Pen -Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain. 3) Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. 4) Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain. 5) PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. 6) P & L: S -Series Tonetic Wood Stain. 7) S -W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. b. First Coat: Cut shellac. 1) Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2) Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3) Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4) PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5) S -W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. c. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler. 1) Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler. 2) Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler. 3) Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. 4) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. 5) PPG: (none required) 6) S -W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. d. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish. 1) Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. 2) Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish. 3) Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. 4) Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. 5) PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. 6) P & L: Clear Finish Gloss. 7) S -W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. PAINTING 09900 24 Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 1 2/92 2. Stained -Wax Polished Finish: Four finish coats over stain. a. Stain Coat: oil -type interior wood stain. 1) Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain. 2) Fuller: 640 -XX Pen -Chrome Interior Oil Base Wood Stain. 3) Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. 4) Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain. 5) PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base. 6) P & L: S -Series Tonetic Wood Stain. 7) S -W: Oil Stain A-48 Series. b. First Coat: Cut shellac. 1) Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2) Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3) Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4) PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5) S -W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. c. Second, Third, and Fourth Coats: Paste wax. G. Natural -Finish Woodwork: 1. Rubbed Varnish Finish: Two finish coats over shellac plus filler on open -grain wood. a. First Coat: Cut shellac. 1) Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2) Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3) Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4) PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5) S -W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. b. Filler Coat: Paste wood filler. 1) Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler. PAINTING 09900 -`25 7' Copyright 1992 AIA MASTERSPEC 2/92 2) Fuller: 680-00 Pen Chrome Paste Wood Filler. 3) Glidden: Glidden Paste Wood Filler. 4) Moore: Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238. 5) PPG: (none required) 6) S -W: Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. c. Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish. 1) Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Satin Varnish. 2) Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish. 3) Glidden: 82 Woodmaster Satin Sheen Urethane Varnish. 4) Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. 5) PPG: 77-7 Rez Satin Varnish. 6) P & L: Clear Finish Gloss. 7) S -W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. 2. Polished Wax Finish: Four coats. a. First Coat: Cut shellac. 1) _ Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick -Dry Sealer. 2) Glidden: 5035 Ultra -Hide Sanding Sealer. 3) Moore: 413 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer. 4) PPG: 77-30 Quick Drying Sanding Sealer. 5) S -W: Pro -Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer B26V3. b. Second, Third, and Fourth Coats: Paste wax. END OF SECTION 09900 r� PAINTING [1 09900 - 26 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 1 1 4/91 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 6161R \;Y4 A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Prime coats for substrates are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Samples in the event the existing vinyl cannot be matched for selection purposes of each type of wall covering required, in manufacturer's standard sizes showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 1. Full -width sample, not less than 36 inches long, of each wall covering specified. Show complete pattern repeat. D. Product certificates signed by wall covering manufacturer certifying materials furnished comply with specified requirements. E. Certified test reports showing compliance with requirements for fire performance characteristics and physical properties. F. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining wall covering. 2. Precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 1 FCopyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC is 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4/91 A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify wall coverings with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg F (16 deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10 days after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERING MATERIALS A. Refer to Wall Covering Data Sheets at the end of this Section. Data sheets specify manufacturer, style, color, pattern, size, and related requirements for wall covering materials. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, wall coverings that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Wall Covering Data Sheet. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. General: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall covering and substrate application. B. Characteristics: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining, and strippable. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Molding: Comply with ASTM B 221, aluminum alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions, finish AA-M31A31, with one-piece cap and wall flange tapering to feather edge. B. Wall Liner: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven, synthetic }*}"" underlayment. L � WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 4/91 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for surface preparation. 1. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 3. Metals: If not factory -primed, clean and apply rust inhibitive zinc primer. 4. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 5. Prime new gypsum board with a recommended primer. 6. Allow new plaster to cure. Treat areas of high alkalinity. C. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semi -gloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. D. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle -free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall covering installation until wall liner has dried. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. C. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams. D. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. E. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. F. Install metal moldings in longest practical lengths.Adhere to substrate. Butt end joints and miter corners. WALL COVERINGS 11 09950 -3 k, POO f mom t PW k t Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 4/91 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. 3.4 WALL COVERING SCHEDULE A. Wall covering materials are scheduled on the following "Data Sheets." END OF SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS 09950 - 4 Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 5/91 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A. This Section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments. B. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Metal, baked enamel finish. 2. Plastic laminate finish. C. Styles of toilet compartments include: 1. Floor -anchored, overhead -braced. D. Styles of screens include: 1. Floor -anchored. 2. Wall -hung. E. Supports for attaching compartments to overhead structural system are specified in a Division 5 Section. F. Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders, grab bars, and purse shelves, are specified in another Division 10 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. C. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1 Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 D. Samples of full range of colors for each type of unit required to match. Submit 6 -inch -square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet compartments and related items. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel - Baked Enamel Finish: a. Accurate Partition Corp. b. All American Metal Corp. c. American Sanitary Partition Corp. d. Ampco Products, Inc. e. Flush -Metal Partition Corp. f. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp. g. Global Steel Products Corp. �^ h. Knickerbocker Partition Corp. I i. Lambaton-Universal Metal Products. j. Metpar Steel Products Corp. k. The Mills Company. 1. Monarch Toilet Partitions, Inc. u M. Sanymetal Products Co. n. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc. a 2. Plastic Laminate: a. Accurate Partitions Corp. b. All American Metal Corp. c. American Sanitary Partition Corp. d. Ampco Products, Inc. e. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 f r Copyright AIA 1991, MASTERSPEC f. Columbia Partitions, Inc. g. DesignRite Partitions, Inc. h. Flush -Metal Partition Corp. i. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp. j. Global Steel Products Corp. k. Knickerbocker Partition Corp. 1. Lambaton-Universal Metal Products. m. Metpar Steel Products Corp. n. Monarch Toilet Partitions, Inc. o. Sanymetal Products Corp. p. Weis/Robart Partitions, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS 5/91 A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks,' roller marks,, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA Std. LD -3, minimum 0.050 inch thick, color and pattern as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from plastic laminate manufacturer's standards. C. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's standard plywood or particleboard in thickness to provide nominal dimension of 1 inch minimum for all components. 1. Pilasters (overhead -braced): 0.0396 inch (20 gage). 2. Pilasters (unbraced): 0.0516 inch (18 gage). 3. Panels and Screens: 0.0396 inch (20 gage). 4. Doors: 0.0336 inch (22 gage). D. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 0.108 inch (12 gage), galvanized steel sheet. E. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 0.0785 inch (14 gage), galvanized steel sheet. F. Core Material for Metal Partitions: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of impregnated Kraft paper in thickness to provide finished dimension of 1 inch minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches minimum for pilasters. G. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 inches high,- 0.0396 inch thick (20 gage), finished to match hardware. H. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's- standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either chromium -plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") or anodized aluminum. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 1 I. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's ufacturer s standard design, heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of r- chromium -plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). J. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum, antigrip profile, with clear anodized finish. K. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized, cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective -coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24 -inch -wide in -swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32 -inch -wide (clear opening) 33 -inch -wide out -swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped. C. Plastic Laminate Compartments and Screens: Pressure -laminate one-piece face sheets to core material. with no splices or joints and with edges straight and sealed. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect against moisture. D. Metal Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and seal edges with continuous interlocking strip or with lapped and formed edges. Weld edges and corners with exposed welds ground smooth. E. Overhead -Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous, extruded, aluminum, antigrip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. F. Floor -Supported Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters to permit structural connection at floor. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage. I TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 t Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 G. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. -Provide gravity type, spring -action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit, designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 3. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out -swinging doors. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors. 2.4 FINISH A. Color: One of manufacturer's standard colors in each room that matches the existing color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup -brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Overhead -Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Floor -Supported Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchorages having not less than 2 inches penetration into structural floor, unless otherwise recommended by partition manufacturer. Level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. TOILET' COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 5 Copyright AIA 1991 MASTERSPEC 5/91 D. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices as recommended by manufacturer to suit supporting structure. Set units to provide support and to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 6 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91' SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled. B. Toilet compartments and related accessories are specified in -- Division 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, -- dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes. C. Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable full-size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. D. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. E. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation instructions, and _ directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. F. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 1 r e Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 r concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable r to Architect. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, ,., and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with fi and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. 6. McKinney/Parker. 2.2 GRAB BARS A. For locations where none exist, provide grab bars equal to: Bobrick B-6206.99 x (Length indicated on plans). B. When matching existing: Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 0.05 inch (18 gage) and as follows: I. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. Match existing. 2. Mounting: Exposed, manufacturer's standard flanges and anchorages. Match existing 3. Clearance: 1 -1/2 -inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. Match existing. 5. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture. Match existing. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 2 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 6.Medium-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/4 inches. Match existing. 7. Heavy -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches. Match existing. 2.3 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT A. Equal to: Bobrick B-5181 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Only a maximum 1 -1/2 -inch -diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. _. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior - surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. C. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. -- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Install grab bars to withstand'a downward load of at least 250 lbf, complying with ASTM F 446. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 3 Copyright 1991 AIA MASTERSPEC 8/91 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800 - 4 ELEVATORS page Section 14.240 Part I General 1.01 Related Documents A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements (Division 1), apply to the work specified in this section. P, "clated work noted in other sections of these speci-fications. LJ Wiring to -a dedicated outside line from the elevator conL evice. l Sys` --em for the emergency communication a 2. Smoke detectors mounted in the elevator lobbies and maclin room needed to work in conjunction with the Firefighter's service. Relocate the asht ..'ays -mounted in the elevator lobbies below '- thr. hall in tile Lubhock. lnt.ernat-iAnal Airport and mlini.c.i.pal �3quare (L P & L). 1,0') Summary L A. The ,-,ork in this section includes the following modilica--4c.ns to the elevators. 71pvator controls and signals c o mm ni c a t i c n ser. vice vi ce to the elelTal-ors F i-7 f ser�, 1.03 Sulbmjittals A. S -o,10 -it product data for each component or product of each elev,�tor control, including certified test reports on reauired. testing L g. Indicate capac Ujt4 les, sizes, performance and operating characteristics, features of control system, finishes, and similar information. Tinc',icate any variations from specified requirements. R. Provide shop drawings showing location of new systems in relation to existing. C. Provide certificates and permits to the Owner with copies of all inspection/acceptance certificates and.operating permits as required governing authorities to allow normal, unrestricted use of elevators. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. TnNtaller Qualifications 1, TEngage the elevator modifications manufacturer or an installer ELEVATORS Section 14.240 page 2 approved by the elevator manufacturer and who has completed elevator control installations similar in material, design, and extent to the indicated for Project which have resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements _. In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable requirements of AS2:E/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators aria Escalators (hereafter referred to as the "Code";, and state of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers, an6 the Aineric ns with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelinez. i.G5 Warranty A. Special Project Warranty P-.,-',5vide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, _n: raller, and :Manufacturer, agreeing to replace, repair, or restore defective materials and wa rkmanship of elevator control work during warranty period. This warranty shall. be in addition to, and not a limitation. of, other rights the Or,ner =i,a.y have a;ainst the Contractor under the Contract Documents. P. Defective is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required <<1niIUll'tS, PYCeSS2ve_ wear, Unusua -deterioration or ging of t2i or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need of excessive maintenance abnormal noise or vibration, and similar --.)nusual, 1Inexpected, and unsat..s.factory conditions. --ty period is 12 months starting on the date of substantial completion. Part 2. Products 2.01 Manufacturers A. Products to he provided by the following or approved equal. 1. Dover Elevator Company 2. Otis Elevator Company 02 Material and Components � f^ A. Lubbock International Airport - two Dover elevators V 1. Hall Stations: Replace the existing hall stations. The neva �,., stations will. allow for the proper mounting height of 42" ELEVATORS Section 14.240 page 3 centerline above the finished floor (a.f.f.) of the pushbuttons. The stations will be #4 stainless steel and shall be of the _ type which do not require cutting and patching of the lobby walls. 2. Car Directional Lanterns: Install #4 stainless steel car direction lanterns mounted in the strike jamb. The East elevator_- requires one for the front entrance. The West elevator requires two, one for the front entrance and one for the rear entrance. 3. Jamb Plates: Install ##4 stainless steel jamb plates with raised. floor marking in black. The plates shall be mount.e3 at a he4ght of 60" centerline a.f.f. on each side of the entrance at each I The plates shall. be permanently affixed. with mec��ar�ical ;'asteners. =.. `ar Stations: Install oversize #4 stainless steel car station. faceplate.. The new faceplates will allow for proper mounting height and configuration of the devices. Reuse the existing devices with the exception of the emergency stop switch which tJ.l1 be replaced with a keyed stop switch. The emergency devices ?,ll. be grouped at the bottom of the stations. The new faceplate !•ai11 include permanently affixedbraille ,dates moLlr!te�l to the left of the standard and emergency operating devices. The stations _ will also include an emergency light unit. 5. Floor Passing Signal: Perform the necessary wirin and ci.rclrit.rl- changes arid install the necessary hardware to allow for the floor passing signals. 6. rrergency Corn.m-!tnication System: Install a communication device which does not require voice activation. The device will �e #t stainless steel ane. flush mounted in the car station. _ 7. Adjustment: Adjust the door and. signal t.imino- as needed. 8. „ir.efightfr's Service operation: InstaJ.J. Firefighter's Service in accordance with the currenr editions of the American National Standard Institute - Safety Code for Elevator and Escalators (ANSI A17.1). B. Municipal. Square (L P & L) - two West.ingbouse elevators 1. Hail Stations: Replace the existing hall stations. The new stations will allow for the proper mounting height of 42" centerline above the finished floor (a.f.f.) of the pushbuttons. The stations will be #4 stainless steel and shall. be of the type which do not require cutting and patching of the lobby walls. 2. Car Directional Lanterns: install #4 stainless steel cal: direction Lanterns mounted in the strike jamb. 3. Jamb Plates: Install #4 stainless steel jamb plates with raised floor marking in black. The plates shall be mounted at a height of 60" centerline a.f.f. on each side of the entrance at each landing. The plates shall be permanently affixed with mechanical. r ELEVATORS page 4 Section 14.240 fasteners. 4. Car Stations: Install oversize #4 stainless steel car stations complete with new operating devices. The new stations will allow for proper mounting height of the devices. The new stations will allow for proper mounting height of the devices. The emergency devices will be grouped at the bottom of the stations. The new car stations will include permanently affixed braille plates mounted to the left of the standard and emergency operating devices. The stations will also include an emergency light unit. 5. Floor Passing Signal: Perfo2.rn the necessary wiring and circuitry oranges and install the necessary hardware to allow f. -,r the floor pa.,sing signals. - 6. Emergency Communication System: Install a communication device �ahi.ch does not require voice activation. The device will ne *!4 :-'-ainless steel. and flush mounted in the car station. Adi,'1stment: Adjust the door and signal timing as needed. n. t- -i Y}- erg - -- - tf Service on8rb.t foil : instal ' F .raf i crliter' in accordance with the carr c "' editions of the Amer -i ca.r 1`Io_t i r?n S'anc7,are Institute - Safety - o?e for Elevator ane Fscala.tn;., ,'ANSI A17.1). C. City Municinal Building - one Otis elevator 1. Jamb Plates. Instal ,� s -t s steel i r4 : L{].n1eSplates floor marking .in black. The plates shag.'�be d a- r.i eci a- -mounted a . a height of 60" centerline a.f.f.. on each side cf the entrance at each landing. he plates shall be permanently affi::ed ..Tith me&,an;_ca.l 2. Floor Passing Signal: Perform the necessary wiring and circuitry changes .and install the necessary hardware to allov for the tl.cor passing signals and double hall gongs in the ar,wn direct io-., Car Station: Replace the existing ' car station flog desir;:,Gtion plates with braille plates with Y�aised floor markings. 4. Emergency Communication System: Install a communication device which does not require voice activation. The device Will he #4 stainless steel and flush mounted in- the car station. 5. Adjustment: Adjust the door and signal timing as needed., Part 3 Execution 3.01 Examination r 4.. Prior to commencing elevator control installation, examine f-ki.sting r control panels as constructed; verify all dimensions and examine supporting structure and all 'other conditions under which elevator n work is to be installed. Notify Contractor in writing of. any dimensional. discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the ELEVATORS Section 14.240 page 5 proper installation or performance of elevator work. Do not proceed with elevator control installation until unsatisfactory- conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 Installation of Elevator Control System A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work required during installation. 3,03 Protection A, At tine of substantial completion of elevator work for portion thereof); provide suitable protective coverings; barriers, devices, F'1pvato.r work from damage i)',CjF-%erioration. Maintain 1 -rote t-1ve measures throughout remainder of construction period. T):?P}o? stmt ion A. `nstruct. Owne=r's yersonne_.1 41; ,,-roper ,ise, operations, ..nd da, i ly main- t.='na.nce of e1.e.tors. Review emergenc., provisions, lnclualnc� emer-- gency access and 2rocedures to be followed at tiIRe of f'ailv�re _n operat.lon and other building emergencies: Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be folirwed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions- Confer with Owner on require- ments for a complete elevato-r maintenance program. P. Make a. final check of elevator operation with Owner's personnel preser.t and Just prior to data of substantial completi-on. F)etermine thlat- cor.t.rol systems a.nd operating devices are functioning properly. End of Section F h ell SECTION 15210 P-MiR-URN� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.02 SCOPE: A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. f~ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Piping inside of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast Iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphalts or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. B. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste! and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required. C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and Type L copper for lines smaller than 2". C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, and Cold): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint r► fittings. 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES: A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, E1jer, and Kohler will be acceptable. P' B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. nC. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. r► i I 15210-1 D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor. the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. J. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards. Water Closet "WB" Bowl Eller 111-1244, 1.5GPF water saver, elongated bowl. Flush valve Seat Water Closet "WC" Spacer Urinal "UB" Fixture Flush Valve Lavatory "LB" Fixture Supply P -trap Stops. risers siphon jet. handicapped 16-3/4" height, with bolt covers. ADA compliant. Sloan Regal 111, 11-1/2" riser. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Beneke SL-504-WHT, handicap accessible toilet spacer, elongater bowl. Eljer 161-1100 vitreous china, blowout action, with chair carrier and 1-1/4" top spud. Mount lip 19" above the floor. Sloan Royal 180 Eljer 051-3324 vitreous china 20" x 17" self rim, with 4" drillings. 557-1122, single Chrome lever handle, aerator, and 803-0552 perforated grid strainer. 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. 15210-2 Lavatory "LC" Fixture w Supply Tailpiece r t P trap Stops, risers Carrier Insulation r Electric Water Cooler "EWC" r Fixture P -trap Stop Shower Head "SH" Fixture Eljer 051-1644 vitreous china 20" x 18" for concealed arms, with 4" drillings. Mount with 30" clearance under apron. 557-1122, single lever chrome handle, and aerator. 803-0530 with offset drain for wheelchair. 8041180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Wade chair carrier for concealed arms. Truebro 102W insulation for p -trap, offset tailpiece, and hot and cold supplies. Elkay EHFA-8 for the handicapped with stainless steel receptor and enamel cabinet. ADA compliant. E1jer 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and wheel handle stop. Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower control with check valves, stops, and chrome plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-337 vandal proof shower head, universal ball joint, 2-1/2 GPM volume control, Powers No. 141-341 C.P. anchor plate. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 Where indicated by the Architect install new fixtures, supply and trim as required by and in compliance with all federal, state and local Codes and Standards. r3.02 When relocating an existing fixture, replace the existing trim and supply to match those specified in Part 2. +^ 3.03 When installing a new fixture, rework in -wall rough -ins as required to match those required by the new fixture. r 15210-3 DRAWINGS ADA COMPLIANCE PHASE CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS NOVEMBER 1993 ARC41 c7 vry -TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS 3416 JOLIET AVENUE LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79413 (806)792-2824 ti s ADA COMPLIANCE - PHASE I CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS NOVEMBER 1993 TISDEL AND ASSOCIATES ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS - DRAWINGS A-1 SITE PLAN A-1.1 PLAN NOTES A-2 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-3 ENLARGED TOILET PLAN A-4 SITE PLAN A-5 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-6 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-6.1 PLAN NOTES A-7 PARTIAL FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-7.1 PLAN NOTES A-8 FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-9 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-10 SITE PLAN A-11 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-11.1 PLAN NOTES A-12 MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN A-13 RESTROOM PLAN A-14 RESTROOM PLAN A-15 FLOOR PLAN A-15.1 PLAN NOTES A-15.2 DETAIL A-16 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-17 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-18 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-19 DETAILS A-20 SITE PLAN A-21 FLOOR PLAN A-21.1 PLAN NOTES A-22 MILLWORK A-23 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-24 SITE PLAN A-25 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-25.1 PLAN NOTES A-26 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-27 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-28 PARTIAL CITY PLAN A-29 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-29.1 PLAN NOTES A-30 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-31 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN A-32 HANDICAP FIXTURE SCHEDULE A-33 HANDICAP PARKING DETAIL A-34 HANDICAP PARKING DETAIL A-35 HANDICAP PARKING DETAIL A-36 ALTERNATES HEALTH DEPARTMENT HEALTH DEPARTMENT HEALTH DEPARTMENT HEALTH DEPARTMENT MUNICIPAL BUILDING MUNICIPAL BUILDING MUNICIPAL SQUARE MUNICIPAL BUILDING POLICE DEPARTMENT POLICE DEPARTMENT MAHON LIBRARY MAHON LIBRARY GODEKE LIBRARY GODEKE LIBRARY GODEKE LIBRARY LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT CEMETERY OFFICE CEMETERY OFFICE CEMETERY OFFICE CLAPP PARTY HOUSE GEORGE WOODS POOL CENTRAL SENIOR CITIZEN CENTER CENTRAL SENIOR CITIZEN CENTER MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER WAGNER PARK RESTROOM MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER OUTDOOR CENTER/Ma.cKENZIE PARK LOU STUBBS PARTY HOUSE ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CENTER ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CENTER ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CENTER MAHON PARTY HOUSE WOODS COMMUNITY CENTER SITE FLA4-,l Ti s v6o, 1 j E HEALTH DEPARTMENT 1902 TEXAS PAGE NO: A-1 s• i i s r HEALTH DEPARTMENT PLAN NOTES: "O" SHEET Al (ALTERNATE NO. 2) - NOTES 1-9 1. EXISTING HANDICAP PARKING SPACE WITH SIGN. PAINT THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY ON THE GROUND. SEE SHEET A35. 2. EXISTING ACCESS AISLE TO REMAIN. 3. STRIPE SPACE FOR HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33, A34 &A35 FOR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. 4. ACCESS AISLE - PAINT DIAGONAL STRIPING. 5. ACCESS AISLE - PAINT DIAGONAL STRIPING ON EXISTING PARKING SPACE. 6. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN ON POST IN THIS PARKING SPACE ONLY. SEE SIGN DETAIL ON A33. 7. EXISTING PARKING SPACE STRIPING (SHOWN DASHED) TO BE REMOVED. S. NEW PARKING SPACE STRIPING. 9. ACCESS CROSSING - PAINT DIAGONAL STRIPING FROM EXISTING CURB RAMP TO HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES. HEALTH DEPARTMENT PLAN NOTES "Q" SHEET A2 1. REMOVE TOILET PARTITION, JAMBS AND DOOR. SALVAGE DOOR AND HARDWARE, GRAB BAR AND TOILET PAPER DISPENSER FOR RE -USE. 2. REMOVE DOOR AND HOLLOW METAL FRAME AND SALVAGE FOR RE -USE. 3. REMOVE LAVATORY AND RELOCATE TO LOCATION SHOWN ON SHEET A3. ADJUST PLUMBING AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION AT NEW LOCATION. 4. DRYWALL TO BE REMOVED. 5. REMOVE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 6. ALTERNATE NO. 4: PROVIDE AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSURE TO DOOR OR PAIR OF DOORS. 7. ALTERNATE NO. 4: INTER 10 R/EXTERIOR ACTUATOR FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR(S). HEALTH DEPARTMENT r1902 TEXAS PAGE NO: A-1.1 CORRIMR W,A%IT! W(: j REc�F'T-ioN \/ElFri r., Ll Lc 7 HEALTH DEPARTMENT 1902 TEXAS PAGE NO: A-2 i n C !v 1..,16\r_zg_ NOQTM 111411:1 119R.110V r SEE A32 FOR FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS. FINISHES: FLOOR - VCT; WALLS - PREFINISHED VINYL GYP. BD.; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANELS. 1. RE -HANG TOILET PARTITION DOOR AND JAMB SALVAGED FROM DEMOLITION. 2. HANG NEW TOILET PARTITION IN SAME LOCATION. PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING PARTITIONS. FIELD VERIFY DIMENSIONS. 3. RE -MOUNT GRAB BAR SALVAGED FROM DEMOLITION. 4. RE -MOUNT TILT -MIRROR AT 48" AFF TO BOTTOM OF MIRROR. 5. RE -HANG LAVATORY AND INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE, SHEET A32. 6. SALVAGED TOILET ACCESSORIES TO BE MOUNTED AT HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE HEIGHTS. SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE; SHEET A32. 7. INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE; SHEET A32, FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. 8. NEW WALL. 212ST25 STUDS WITH 518" TYPE "X" GYPSUM BOARD. NEW VINYL - FACED GYPSUM BOARD TO MATCH EXISTING. PATCH VCT FLOOR AND SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING FINISHES. 9. ALARM - INSTALL AN AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SYSTEM AT THIS LOCATION. TIE INTO EXISTING ALARM SYSTEM. LOCATE DEVICE 80" AFF OR 6" BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 10. RE -HANG SALVAGED DOOR AND FRAME. HEALTH DEPARTMENT 1902 TEXAS PAGE NO: A-3 PLAN NOTES: "0" (ALTERNATE NO. 2) 1. PAINT THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY ON EXISTING PARKING SPACE. PROVIDE AND INSTALL HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE SIGN WITH "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN AND POST IN FRONT OF THE PARKING SPACE. SEE A33. 2. ACCESS AISLE - PAINT DIAGONAL STRIPING ON EXISTING PARKING SPACE, 3. ACCESS CROSSING - PAINT DIAGONAL STRIPING FROM EXISTING CURB RAMP TO HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES. Mui 13 t s 1 r=-EZr- PART) /� L 017E F'L.aN G� HOOTM SC.,A L -EE : IN = 20 MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13th STREET PAGE NO: A-4 PLAN -NOTES:_ Y KNISHES: FLOOR - TERAZZWALLS - CERAMIC TILE; BASE •CERAMIC ^^ TILE; CEILING 2x4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANELS. I II I 1. INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. El 2. LOWER URINAL AND FLUSH VALVE, SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE; SHEET A32. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 3. (ALTERNATE NO. 1) ELEVATOR - ADD FLOOR DESIGNATION AT EACH JAMB AT ALL THREE FLOORS, AUDIBLE UP AND DOWN TONE, BRAILLE DESIGNATION AT FLOOR BUTTONS, STAR AT GROUND Q 0 FLOOR AND HANDLE FOR TELEPHONE BOX. I C (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. O O 5. ALTERNATE NO. 4: PROVIDE AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSURE TO DOOR OR DOORS IN SERIES. _ i. ALTERNATE NO. 4: INTERIOR/EXTERIOR ACTUATOR FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR(S). ( iJ� ❑ Go .21 Z%)R �a3a-r j�I --- �J MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1626 13th STREET MUNICIPAL SQUARE 1015 9th STREET PAGE NO: A-6 PARTIAL FIRST t9-�R p;_AQ SC L-9: kg! = I -GPI �- 10th GTF Z-`r PARTIAL FIRST fijooR aL.4Q SC.AL.E: %8l : I _oq ;oth GTRZ--r 1p MUNICIPAL SQUARE 1015 9th STREET PAGE NO: A-6 FINISHES: FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - CERAMIC TILE; BASE - CERAMIC TILE; CEILING - 2x2 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. 2. GRAB BAR - 42" -MATCH MOUNTING HEIGHT OF THE EXISTING GRAB BAR. kMBS. PAINT TO ;ATION. TIE INTO OW THE CEILING, RESTRCOM WEST RESTRcoH oPP HA00 - RESTRGb!�f PLAN LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT PAGE NO: A-14 r r r MUNICIPAL SQUARE FINISHES: FLOOR - 1" CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - IN VESTIBULE, PLASTER ON CMU;, IN RESTROOM, 1" CERAMIC TILE; BASE - 1" CERAMIC TILE; CEILING - IN VESTIBULE, 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS, IN RESTROOM, 12" ACOUSTICAL INTERLOCKING TILES. 1. (ALTERNATE NO. 1) ELEVATOR- (ALL THREE FLOORS AND BOTH CABS) LOWER HALL CALL BUTTONS; PROVIDE FLOOR DESIGNATION ON EACH JAMB AT ALL THREE FLOORS PROVIDE: AUDIBLE SIGNAL FOR UP AND DOWN, LOWER INTERIOR PANEL AND PROVIDE BRAILLE AT ALL BUTTONS AND A STAR AT THE MAIN FLOOR. 2. REMOVE DRINKING FOUNTAIN AND INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE; SHEET A32. 3. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN AND CHANGE KNOB FAUCET' HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE; SHEET A32. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. 4. LOWER URINAL AND FLUSH VALVE. SEE HANDICAPPED FIXTURE SCHEDULE; SHEET A32. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 5. REMOVE WING WALL. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL AND FLOOR AND 12" ACOUSTICAL INTERLOCKING CEILING TILE. 6. REMOVE PLASTER WALL WITH MASONRY BACKUP AND INSTALL NEW GYP. BD. WALL WIDTH 3 5/8" METAL STUDS 18" FROM DOOR JAMB. PATCH PLASTER WALL, CERAMIC TILE FLOOR AND 2x4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING. RELOCATE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER LOCATED IN MECHANICAL ROOM. THE WATER HEATER IS ON AN ANGLE IRON PLATFORM THAT IS BOTH WALL MOUNTED AND SUSPENDED FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. 7. (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. S. REVERSE DOOR SWING. PATCH HINGE AND STRIKE AND PAINT. 9. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE - MOVE HANDICAP PARKING SPACE AND SIGN FROM THE CORNER OF 9th & TEXAS TO THE CORNER OF TEXAS AND 10th. MOVE DROP-OFF ZONE ONE SPACE TO THE WEST. ADD "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN TO RELOCATED SIGN. 10. ALTERNATE NO. 4: PROVIDE_ AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSURE TO DOOR OR DOORS IN SERIES. 11. ALTERNATE NO. 4: INTERIOR/EXTERIOR ACTUATOR FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR(S). MUNICIPAL SQUARE 1016 9th STREET PAGE NO: A-6.1 i vChly 1016 9th STREET PAGE NO: A-7 FMUNICIPAL SQUARE - POLICE STATION P1IE�• "O" SH FI.._AZ SEE A32 FOR FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS. FINISHES: FLOOR - 1 " CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - MEN, PLASTER ON CMU, WOMEN, 1 " CERAMIC TILE ON PLASTER ON CMU; BASE - 4" VINYL; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS 1. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - REMOVE AND INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 2. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED, 3. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. PATCH 1" CERAMIC TILE WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. 4. MIRROR - LOWER BOTTOM TO 40" AFF. 5. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN AND CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. PATCH PLASTER FINISHED MASONRY WALL. IN WOMEN'S, 1" CERAMIC TILE HAS BEEN APPLIED OVER THE PLASTER. 6. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER - RECESSED, LOWER TO 48" AFF AT CONTROLS. PATCH PLASTER FINISHED MASONRY WALL. IN WOMEN'S, 1 " CERAMIC TILE HAS BEEN APPLIED OVER THE PLASTER. 7. FEMININE NAPKIN DISPENSER - REMOVE AND RELOCATE TO SPOT SHOWN ON PLAN (WET WALL) AND MOUNT CONTROL AT 48" AFF. PATCH WALL S. ALTERNATE NO. 4: PROVIDE AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSURE TO DOOR OR DOORS IN SERIES. 9. ALTERNATE NO. 4: INTERIOR/EXTERIOR ACTUATOR FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR(S). t' �- POLICE DEPARTMENT 1016 9th STREET PAGE NO: A-7.1 .PLAflLNOTES: "Q" 1. (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE AND MOVE FROM THE ALCOVE TO THE PANEL NORTH OF THE BUILDING PLAQUE ON THE SAME WALL. 0 Ac 2----------------1 0 b O � O ❑ to ❑ Q ❑ El �r�; —t ---------1 � l:.i � il�tti j: ( �' l i t s F'1 Ilifi :.. ...•,,s,l, I :ii:!=t +lf'll��'lili: =::�f' 1 !I s ) f.t!l: •' , U uM. • s?� s! ft:? ??;t.. s iririi::: uit; :i I _ ���lt# 22 tltrii 1,..__.. "t:�:�Y�•= t�.T �•� __ t3 ❑ E31 D ❑ O O FIRST ��-c�vR PLAN G� 0 O O MAHON LIBRARY 1306 9th STREET. PAGE NO: A-8 FINISHES: FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - CERAMIC TILE; BASE - COVED CERAMIC TILE; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. REMOVE DOOR HINGES AND STRIKE. PATCH FRAME. 2. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN AND CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. 3. TOILET PARTITION - REMOVE EXISTING TOILET PARTITION AND DOOR AND INSTALL NEW 69" LONG PARTITION WITH 33" DOOR. MATCH EXISTING. STALL DIMENSION IS 36" CLEAR. FIELD VERIFY. IN WOMEN'S RESTROOM, CUT JAMB AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW PARTITION. 4. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM AND FLUSH VALVE TO 44" AFF MAX. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 5. RE -ATTACH SHELF. 6. INSTALL AN AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SYSTEM AT THIS LOCATION. TIE INTO EXISTING ALARM SYSTEM. LOCATE DEVICE 80" AFF OR 6" BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 11 Qq) MAHON LIBRARN 1306 9th STREET PAGE NO: A-cl PLAN NOTES• "0- 1 - n"1. EXISTING HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES TO REMAIN. 2. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE - IN EXISTING STRIPED PARKING SPACES, PAINT HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE SYMBOL ON THE ASPHALT PAVING AND DIAGONALLY STRIPE THE SPACE TO THE SOUTH FOR THE ACCESS AISLE. INSTALL HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN SALVAGED FROM THE MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. SEE A33. ITE FLAW SGA LE ' r- Q?UAKEp, AvENIJE, GODEKE LIBRARY 6601 QUAKER PAGE NO: A-10 r F'Aut NO: A-11 r GODEKE LIBRARY PLAN--N0.IE6�_" !--6t1EET_.A11 FINISHES: FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - 4" CERAMIC TILE; BASE - CERAMIC TILE; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. REMOVE LOOSE BENCH FROM LOBBY TO ALLOW ACCESS TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. 2. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - REMOVE AND INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 3. LAVATORY - CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. 4. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. 5. TOILET PARTITION - REMOVE EXISTING TOILET PARTITION AND DOOR AND INSTALL NEW 69" LONG PARTITION WITH 33" DOOR. MATCH EXISTING. STALL DIMENSION IS 36" CLEAR. FIELD VERIFY. IN WOMEN'S RESTROOM, CUT JAMB AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW PARTITION, 6. REMOVE EXISTING (2) 36" GRAB BARS AND REINSTALL NEW (2) 42" GRAB BARS. SALVAGE FOR USE IN ANOTHER FACILITY. 7. URINAL - LOWER FLUSH VALVE TO 44". PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 8. LOWER ONE OF THE FOUR COMPUTERIZED CARD CATALOGS FROM 41 " TO 34" AFF. 9. INSTALL AN AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SYSTEM AT THIS LOCATION. TIE INTO EXISTING ALARM SYSTEM. LOCATE DEVICE 80" AFF OR 6" BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 10. ALTERNATE NO. 4: PROVIDE AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSURE TO DOOR OR DOORS IN SERIES. 11. ALTERNATE NO. 4: INTERIOR/EXTERIOR ACTUATOR FOR AUTOMATIC DOOR(S). GODEKE LIBRARY 6601 QUAKER ` PAGE NO: A-11.1 i PLAN NOTES: "O" FINISHES: FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - CERAMIC TILE; BASE - CERAMIC TILE; CEILING - 2x2 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS., 1. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. 2. GRAB BAR - 42" - MATCH MOUNTING HEIGHT OF THE EXISTING GRAB BAR. 3. INSTALL NEW 33" TOILET PARTITION DOOR AND TWO NEW JAMBS. PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING. 42" STALL. FIELD VERIFY. 4. REMOVE CHANGING TABLE AND PATCH WALL. 5. INSTALL AN AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SYSTEM AT THIS LOCATION. TIE INTO EXISTING ALARM SYSTEM. LOCATE DEVICE 80" AFF OR 6" BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. 7roLa�1 �1A�j� �tMS LUBBOCK INTERNATIONAL --,CAL-= :411 = I _ 0,1 AIRPORT PAGE NO: A-13 CEMETERY OFFICE 2011 E. 34th PAGE NO: A-15 c 7 CEMETERY OFFICE FIL N.-NO-ITESLJ _" SEE A32 FOR FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS. 1. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN AND CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. 2. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS, 3. MIRROR - INSTALL BOTTOM AT 40" AFF. 4. SOAP DISPENSER - INSTALL AT 44" AFF. S. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER - INSTALL AT 44" AFF AT CONTROLS. 6. GRAB BAR — 36" IN LENGTH. 7. GRAB BAR - 42" IN LENGTH. 8. WATER HEATER - MOVE FROM THIS LOCATION TO NEW LOCATION SHOWN ON PLAN (NOTE 9). 9. WATER HEATER - RE -INSTALL. (GAS) 10. REMOVE ENTRY DOOR AND ENOUGH WALL TO INSTALL 36" DOOR. REMOVE STORAGE ROOM AND DOOR. REMOVE 9" VCT AND REPLACE WITH 12" VCT. PATCH PLASTER WALLS AND 12" ACOUSTICAL INTERLOCKING CEILING TILES. MATCH CORNICE MOULD AND 4" VINYL BASE. 11. INSTALL NEW 36" HOLLOW CORE DOOR AND FRAME WITH LEVER—TYPE HANDLE. 12. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - REMOVE. 13. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - INSTALL HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 14. REMOVE BRICK PLANTER AND 15. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE — STRIPE ONE W-0" WIDE PARKING SPACE AND A 8'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) ACCESS AISLE TO THE RIGHT OF THE ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. CENTER THE ACCESS AISLE ON THE EXISTING CURB RAMP. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33 FOR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE REQUIRED HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. 16. REMOVE GLASS DOOR AND PIVOT EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE AND ALUMINUM STOREFRONT (SHOWN DASHED). PATCH STUCCO WALL, WOOD SOFFIT AND CONCRETE FLOOR WHERE STOREFRONT WAS REMOVED. 17. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT AND DOOR TO MATCH EXISTING FINISH. PROVIDE BREAK METAL (MATCH EXISTING) AT BOTH JAMBS TO CLOSE OFF ANGLED BLOCKING AT NORTH WALL AND EXISTING FURRED OUT BLOCKING AT EAST WALL. 18. REMOVE CONCRETE WALK FROM EXPANSION JOINT AT OPENING TO WHERE NEW STOREFRONT ENDS. REPLACE WITH 3000 PSI CONCRETE AND POUR CONCRETE UNDER EAST SIDE OF NEW STOREFRONT. TIE TO EXISTING CONCRETE WITH #3 REBARS @ 12" O.C., OR AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION, REMOVE ENTIRE CONCRETE PORCH AND POUR NEW SLAB. CEMETERY OFFICE I 2011 E. 34th PAGE NO: A-16.1 r u - d Lu cn 00 STLA: st"2 ALdH. P9P•ME CENTER i5e'rW EaQ �XIsT. oPE� I I•!Gr CAM. k t EA . Si pE �XISTINc WALL \ \ ALUM. I=tz dM E . 25P446%V. MEFT?,L. OVE 2 EXIST. WALL. (Ep., sI1;:E) GPS L {-- I/,&% c I/A 15.2 jklela> SCA.L•Es 311 = I -o \,,,_13/ 3� to%dli 4��II flitl�� �o. i; �,�Zi 814 ���� � q 3 t� ul �� 0 cJ 2/A I S. 2 3/A 15.2. eLE\/ATioNG CEMETERY OFFICE i 2011 E. 34th PAGE NO: A-16.2 i r r- s PLAN NOTES* "Q" FINISHES: FLOOR - VINYL; WALLS - FRP PANELING; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED, SEE A32. 2. REMOVE 24" GRAB BAR AND REPLACE WITH A 36" GRAB BAR SALVAGED FROM GODEKE LIBRARY. PATCH WALL. 3. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. LOWER FLUSH VALVE TO 44". EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 4. LOWER KITCHENETTE COUNTER TO 34" AFF. ADJUST PLUMBING AS REQUIRED, INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. PARTY +40USE RNIRTIAL FLaoF� rL p t j WOMEN CLAPP PARTY HOUSE 4500 AVENUE U PAGE NO: A-16 1 i r r- s PLAN NOTES* "Q" FINISHES: FLOOR - VINYL; WALLS - FRP PANELING; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED, SEE A32. 2. REMOVE 24" GRAB BAR AND REPLACE WITH A 36" GRAB BAR SALVAGED FROM GODEKE LIBRARY. PATCH WALL. 3. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. LOWER FLUSH VALVE TO 44". EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 4. LOWER KITCHENETTE COUNTER TO 34" AFF. ADJUST PLUMBING AS REQUIRED, INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. PARTY +40USE RNIRTIAL FLaoF� rL p t j WOMEN CLAPP PARTY HOUSE 4500 AVENUE U PAGE NO: A-16 r. 4 r "AR` IAL FLOOR FLN4 P1AIN-NOIE "Q SEE A32 FOR FIXTURE MOUNTING HEIGHTS, FINISHES: FLOOR - CONCRETE; WALLS - PAINTED CMU CEILING - NONE 1. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET AD,4 REQUIREMENTS. 2. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. EXTENC PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. 3. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. LOWER FLUSH VALVE TO 44". EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED ANC INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. 4. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - REMOVE AND INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 5. LOWER SNACK COUNTER TO 34" AFF MAXIMUM. REMOVE ONE COURSE OF 7 518" CMU. 6. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE - STRIPE ONE 9'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) PARKING SPACE AND A 8'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) ACCESS AISLE TO THE LEFT OF THE ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. CENTER THE ACCESS AISLE ON THE EXISTING CURB RAMP. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33 FOR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE REQUIRED HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. TT SNP+�I� BAR 5 GEORGE WOODS POOL E. ZENITH & ERSKINE PAGE NO: A-17 El4m_.( D 1 PLAN NOTES: "O" FINISHES: FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - STRUCTURAL GLAZED FACING TILE; BASE - COVED STRUCTURAL GLAZED FACING TILE; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 2. INSTALL NEW 33" TOILET PARTITION DOOR AND 1" NARROWER LATCH JAMB. PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING. 3. INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES IN MEN'S RESTROOM. 4. RELOCATE MIRROR, SOAP AND PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS TO 40" AFF. PATCH WALL. . 5. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. 6. RELOCATE MIRROR TO 40" AFF. 7. NEW WRITING COUNTER. SEE DETAIL ON SHEET A19. VIII wcameq PAFT'IAL iLcoF:Z PLAID NO[T.J SCA.LF---' 8U ; I I_;;, _ m EN CENTRAL SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER 2001 19th PAGE NO: A-18 T" .AW 7D �—='T-A,I L ;0 LAM, PLJASTIC c;Ap NTEFz -re P, I -AM. PLAsrlc , -t-e=-F=,, 4 - ► ��• • MArcN Ey 4 ST•. 2 L/1%jis ss:4 (�_- kcx - C-�. LITE To cXiS�, GAS, 3/,�.I' 1/'4�� CENTRAL SENIOR CITIZENS CENTER 2001 19th PAGE NO: A-19 r r �. To REMAI W. P WE LEGE WC, OP Oc -oa S�ISTIhIG C-�Rj&t r�o -O7 Ne W GrzA,vm +`i8'-Zi2 I�RoAP TIE NCIhIC� TO IZEMAI REMoVE l=XARO Ec> A<a�, P-EdSAT= (9tioWI4 AWp Com. RoUWD CCS Eg BE'NEEN ¢ RhIL- R0#-P TI E fi-EKr-1 Nc ANO RE1'LAC,= �/ ¢o'� P5! P1�sEMESFi RE1N�rz�_._ �rlc FZE'TE . SITE PLAN SCALE: I = �o r k R movC- Ral nE!E� mo r. To E4:> b5" MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER 66th & GARY PAGE NO: A-20 ffLdoR PLAN � e= MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTEI 66th & GAR' PAGE NO: A-2 G 7 MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER PLAN NOTES: "Q" SHEET A21 FINISHES: FLOOR - VINYL; WALLS - PAINTED GYP. BD.; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - REMOVE AND INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 2. REMOVE 32" WOOD DOOR AND FRAME AND DEMO WALL TO RECEIVE 36" 20 -MINUTE DOOR AND FRAME. 3. REMOVE CABINET BASE AND BULKHEAD. INSTALL NEW BULKHEAD AT OPEN END TO MATCH EXISTING 1x CEDAR. PROVIDE 1 112" DIA. PIPE LEG WITH THREADED FLANGES THAT BOLTS TO THE FLOOR FOR SUPPORT. ADJUST PLUMBING AS REQUIRED TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLE TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLE. IN MEN'S RESTROOM, RELOCATE DRINKING FOUNTAIN DRAIN AS REQUIRED TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. SEE DETAIL ON SHEET A22. PATCH WALL AND FLOOR VINYL. 4. INSTALL 42" GRAB BAR. MATCH MOUNTING HEIGHT OF EXISTING GRAB BAR. 5. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. LOWER FLUSH VALVE TO 44". EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. S. CAREFULLY REMOVE CEDAR BENCH AND RELOCATE TO LOCATION SHOWN. 7. MARBLE THRESHOLD. 8. REMOVE ENTIRE WING WALL. MATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL AND PATCH CEILING. REMOVE TWO ROWS OF FLOOR TILE TO RECEIVE MARBLE THRESHOLD. 9. REMOVE ENOUGH WING WALL (APPROX. 7") TO CREATE 36" CLEAR OPENING. REMOVE PLUMBING AND RELOCATE TO NEW LOCATION. SEE NOTE 10. MATCH CERAMIC TILE AND PATCH END. 10. NEW SHOWER UNIT. PATCH CERAMIC TILE WALL. 11. FOLDING SHOWER SEAT EQUAL TO: BOBRICK B-5181. 12. GRAB BAR EQUAL TO BOBRICK; B -6206x36 AT WET WALL (ADD WOOD BLOCKING FROM BACK WHEN INSTALLING SHOWER UNIT) AND B -6206x24. SECURE TO EXISTING WOOD STUDS. 13. LOWER THIS MIRROR ONLY TO 40" AFF. 14. MIRROR - SEE DETAIL/A22. 15. (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. PON MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER 66th & GARY PAGE NO: A-21.1 I U I/A �L��ATIoI.I eGAL. : '% ,611 = I'- oll 1'• UI It's ZJ _- hl MEtJ 2'-��411 � o EN 2/A FLAN SGALe: %811=1-o NQTEs-a "Q" 1. REMOVE CABINET DOORS, CENTER STILE AND OUTSIDE BULKHEAD AT THE BOTTOM OF THE FACE FRAME (APPROX. 28 1/2") AND BASE FROM OUTSIDE BULKHEAD UP TO RIGHT STILE. PATCH VINYL FLOOR AND PATCH AND PAINT GYP. BD. WALL, 2. PROVIDE 1 112" ID. PIPE LEG WITH THREADED FLANGE THAT BOLTS TO THE FLOOR FOR SUPPORT. PAINT TO MATCH WOOD. 3. DUPLEX WALL OUTLET IN MEN'S RESTROOM. 4. MIRROR - IN MEN'S RESTROOM, REMOVE MIRROR AND CUT OFF THE RIGHT END. ROTATE AND RE -MOUNT THE MIRROR TO THE LEFT OF THE OUTLET WITH THE BOTTOM AT 40" AFF AND THE TOP (THE CUT-OFF END) MATCHING THE MIRROR HEIGHT TO THE RIGHT. TOUCH-UP THE EXPOSED WALL. 5. MIRROR - IN WOMEN'S RESTROOM, LOWER MIRROR TO 40" AFF. TOUCH- UP THE EXPOSED WALL. 6. INSTALL NEW BULKHEAD AT OPEN END TO MATCH EXISTING 1 x CEDAR. MUNICIPAL TENNIS CENTER 66th & GARY PAGE NO: A-22 PLAN NOTES: 10 FINISHES: FLOOR - CONCRETE; WALLS - PAINT ON 314" PLYWOOD ON 2x4 WOOD STUDS; BASE - NONE; CEILING - 3/4" PLYWOOD. 1. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. ADJUST OR PROVIDE NEW STAINLESS STEEL SHROUD. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. SEE A32. 2. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 3. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. PATCH WALL. LOWER PUSH BUTTON FLUSH VALVE FROM 52" TO 44". EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED AND INSTALL AN ESCUTCHEON PLATE TO COVER HOLE IN WALL. MEc+4, r r� EA97AL =LOUR FL -AN NOF�i M �• 5T-0&6,� E MEN "S C HASS WAGNER RESTROOM 26th & ELGIN PAGE NO: A-23 COMHUNI,Ty CENTER . 44- r slpcc.E. aRT-IAS 51TE F'! ATI_ MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER ±� ,%40 Scl&.L c 30th &OXFORD i PAGE NO: A-24 PLAN NOT •'n" (ALTERNATE NO. 2) - NOTES 1.9. �,. 1. HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES TO BE RELOCATED TO SOUTH PARKING LOT. 2. REMOVE ACCESS AISLE STRIPING AND DIVIDE PARKING SPACE INTO TWO EQUAL SPACES. 3. IN EXISTING 16'-0" WIDE HANDICAP PARKING SPACE, CREATE A PARKING SPACE 10'-0" WIDE TO THE NORTH OF THE EXISTING PARKING SPACE. r" 4. WITH THE REMAINING 6'-0", EXTEND THE ACCESS AISLE STRIPING. 5. SALVAGE AND RELOCATE THE HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGNS AND POSTS TO THE HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES RELOCATED IN THE SOUTH PARKING LOT. 6. REMOVE STRIPING SHOWN DASHED. 7. MOVE HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN AND POST TO AS CLOSE TO THE MIDDLE IN FRONT OF THE SPACE AS POSSIBLE AND ADD "VAN ACCESSIBLE" 8. SIGN BELOW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN. REMOVE AND SALVAGE HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN AND POST FOR RELOCATION TO ANOTHER SITE REQUIRING A SIGN. 8. HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGNS AND POSTS SALVAGED FROM WEST PARKING LOT. LOCATE AS SHOWN AND BE SURE ARROWS POINT IN THE �., CORRECT DIRECTION. COMHUNI,Ty CENTER . 44- r slpcc.E. aRT-IAS 51TE F'! ATI_ MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER ±� ,%40 Scl&.L c 30th &OXFORD i PAGE NO: A-24 4 1: r OFFICE MULTI - PURFCvSE r NTFR'f ,v l7r,HEN it MEN m 4C. -I 8E3`r Room PAR"71AL. FL oCUR �LAN SCALS : I/all NOTE (a No -r USED GAME RGaM MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER 30th & OXFORD PAGE NO: A-26 r MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER PLA_ N NOTES: "O" $HEELA2� FINISHES: FLOOR - VCT; WALLS - IN WOMEN'S, IMPACT RESISTANT PLASTIC PANELING ON GYP. BD. ON CMU, IN MEN'S, PAINTED GLAZED CMU; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. VINYL COVERED PANELS. 1. CHANGE DOOR SWING TO ALLOW FOR REQUIRED MANEUVERING CLEARANCE. PATCH HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME. 2. SINK COUNTERTOP IS TOO HIGH. LOWER LAMINATE PLASTIC CLAD COUNTERTOP TO 34" AFF. CUT OFF 1" OF THE FRONT FACE SO THAT IT IS 29" AFF TO THE BOTTOM OF THE FRONT FACE. INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLE TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLE. 3. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER - LOWER TO 48" AFF AT CONTROLS. 4. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. PATCH WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. 5. TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER - LOWER TO 48" AFF, PATCH WALL. 6. NOT USED. 7. REMOVE TOILET PARTITION AND DOOR. 8. NEW 34" TOILET PARTITION DOOR AND JAMB. ATTACH LATCH TO WALL. 9. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - REMOVE AND INSTALL NEW HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. 10. REMOVE BI -FOLD DOORS AND REPLACE WITH A PAIR OF 20 -MINUTE DOORS. THE OPENING IS 5'-0" +l-. THE DOORS SHOULD BE 36" (ACTIVE) AND 24". SEE HARDWARE SCHEDULE, 11. (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. 12. REMOVE URINAL SCREEN TO ALLOW DOOR TO OPEN FULLY. PATCH WALL. MAXEY COMMUNITY CENTER 30th & OXFORD PAGE NO: A-26.1 771 oF=P I CE FART FINISHES: FLOOR - SEALED CONCRETE; WALLS - PAINTED WOOD PANELING ; BASE - PAINTED WOOD; CEILING - PAINTED WOOD PANELING. 1. INSTALL NEW 36" x 84" WOOD DOOR AND FRAME IN EXISTING CASED OPENING. RE -USE HARDWARE FROM RESTROOM DOOR REMOVED (NOTE 2). PROVIDE DRYWALL FILL-IN AT LATCH JAMB. 2. REMOVE DOOR. SALVAGE HARDWARE FOR RE -USE (NOTE 1). FILL-IN VOIDS AT HINGES AND LATCH AND RE -PAINT. 3. REMOVE WOOD TOILET PARTITION AND DOOR. PATCH WALL. 4. LAVATORY - RAISE TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS; INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. SEE A32 5. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 6. GRAB BAR - 42" - MOUNT AT 34" AFF. 7. GRAB BAR - 36" - USE TWO SALVAGED FROM GODEKE LIBRARY AND MOUNT AT 34" AFF. S. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE - STRIPE ONE 9'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) PARKING SPACE AND A 8'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) ACCESS AISLE TO THE RIGHT OF THE ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. CENTER THE ACCESS AISLE BETWEEN THE EXISTING CURB STOPS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33 FOR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE REQUIRED HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. ENTRY LOUTDOOR CENTER / MACKENZIE PARK 914 N. OF BROADWAY ON CANYON LAKES DRIVI E75 CAL e NI � (BY JOYLAND PAGE NO: A-2( r� T-< r DARTIAL ':L c)vR FLAW SCALE: I/41= _o PLAN -NOSES: "0" FINISHES: FLOOR - VCT; WALLS - 48" FRP PANELING WAINSCOT ON PAINTED GYP. BD.; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - PAINTED GYP, BD. IN MEETING ROOM, 8'-0" PREFINISHED WOOD PANELING WAINSCOT. 1. REVERSE DOOR SWING. PATCH DOOR FRAME. PROVIDE LEVER -TYPE DOOR HANDLE. 2. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB, FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER - TYPE HANDLES. 3. LOWER MIRROR AND SOAP DISPENSER TO 40" AFF AT BOTTOM EDGE. 4. REMOVE DOOR AND FRAME. 5. PATCH WALL. MATCH WOOD PANELING ON EXTERIOR AND DRYWALL AND "FRP" WAINSCOT ON INTERIOR. 6. REMOVE WALL TO RECEIVE NEW DOOR AND FRAME. SALVAGE PANELING AND "FRP" WAINSCOT FOR PATCHING, 7. NEW 36" x 84" WOOD DOOR AND FRAME TO MATCH EXISTING. S. REMOVE WING WALL. SALVAGE PANELING AND "FRP" WAINSCOT FOR PATCHING, PATCH SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING AND CT FLOOR. 8. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER - TYPE HANDLES. SEE A32 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS. 10. LOWER MIRROR AND SOAP DISPENSER TO 40" AFF AT BOTTOM EDGE. 11. GRAB BAR - 42" - MOUNT AT 34" AFF, 12. GRAB BAR - 36" - MOUNT AT 34" AFF. 13. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 14. LOWER LAMINATE PLASTIC CLAD COUNTER TOP FROM 42" TO 34" MAXIMUM AFF. REMOVE THREE COURSES OF DOUBLE WYTHE FACE BRICK. HOUSE 36th & AVENUE P PAGE NO: A-2, PRNET`f' I`2N5t�N SENIOR C I-rl ZE N Ce N7=R t-NTRY PLAN I<LQSE.E;_. - 0 -(ALTERNATE NO. 2) - NOTES 1 & 2. 1. REMOVE CURB AND GUTTER, TREE AND SOIL TO Q (� PROVIDE HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. 2. PARKING SPACE - STRIPE ONE 9'-0" WIDE PARKING �... SPACE AND AN 8'-0" WIDE ACCESS AISLE TO THE LEFT OF THE ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33 FOR PARKING r REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE REQUIRED HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. PMH ERS T 9�.F;Z-TlA L elTr-- PLAKI ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CENTER I SCA, L -E: /1641 _ _oi = AMHERST & GARY PAGE NO: A-28 jontir- M-919-9 0 z Q .._.1 a _1 d - Q 11 ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CENTER AMHERST & GARY PAGE NO: A-29 i i ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CITIZEN CENTER PLAN NOT "Q" SHEET A29 FINISHES: FLOOR - CERAMIC TILE; WALLS - PAINTED GYP. BD. ON 2x4 STUDS; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. THE CLEARANCE REQUIRED AT THE LATCH SIDE JAMB DOES NOT MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. REVERSE SWING. RE -HANG MEN'S DOOR IN WOMEN'S RESTROOM AND WOMEN'S DOOR IN MEN'S RESTROOM AND PATCH HOLES IN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES. 2. REMOVE TOILET PARTITION AND DOOR. PATCH HOLES IN WALL AND FLOOR. 3. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER - TYPE HANDLES. 4. LAVATORY AND COUNTERTOP - REMOVE ENOUGH OF THE LAMINATE PLASTIC CLAD LAVATORY COUNTERTOP TO PROVIDE 18" CLEARANCE BETWEEN DOOR AND COUNTERTOP. RELOCATED LAVATORY AS REQUIRED. THE COUNTERTOP HAS AN 1 112" PAINTED PLYWOOD END WITH KNEE SPACE AT THE LAVATORY. PATCH COUNTER TOP AND TOP, MATCH LAM. PLASTIC TOP. INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES. 5. PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER - MOVE FROM PRESENT LOCATION TO THE RIGHT OF THE LAVATORY. REMOUNT SO THAT CONTROL IS 44" AFF. 6. REMOVE LAM, CLAD TOILET PARTITION DOOR AND PROVIDE NEW JAMBS OR ADJUST EXISTING JAMBS SO THAT A NEW 33" DOOR WILL FIT. MATCH EXISTING, 7. ALARM - INSTALL AN AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SYSTEM AT THIS LOCATION. TIE INTO EXISTING ALARM SYSTEM. LOCATE DEVICE 80" AFF OR 6" BELOW THE CEILING, WHICHEVER IS LOWER. B. DRINKING FOUNTAIN - RAISE EXISTING HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. SEE HANDICAPPED MOUNTING SCHEDULE; SHEET A32. ARNETT BENSON SENIOR CENTER AMHERST & GARY PAGE NO: A-29.1 r t } W PSN FINISHES: FLOOR - SEALED CONCRETE; WALLS - FRP PANELING WAINSCOT ON GYP. BD.; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - TEXTURED GYP. BD.. 1. REMOVE EXISTING WOOD DOOR, FRAME AND ENOUGH WALL TO INSTALL A 36" x 80" WOOD DOOR AND FRAME TO MATCH EXISTING. INSTALL LEVER -TYPE DOOR HANDLE ON MEN'S RESTROOM. 2. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 3. GRAB BAR - 42" - MOUNT AT 34" AFF. 4. GRAB BAR - 36" - MOUNT AT 34" AFF. 5. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. CHANGE KNOB FAUCET HANDLES TO LEVER -TYPE HANDLES IN MEN'S RESTROOM. 6. LOWER MIRROR TO 40" AFF. LOWER PAPER TOWEL AND SOAP DISPENSERS TO 44" AFF. 7. REMOVE 2x4 STUD WALL AND BUILD NEW PARTITION WALL WITH 2x4 STUDS TURNED SO THAT THE WALL IS 1-112" THICK WITH 518" TYPE "X' GYP BD. REINFORCE WALL WITH 2x6 JOISTS AT 16" O.C. BRACED FROM NEW STUD WALL TO WET WALL. 8. LOWER PAPER TOWEL AND SOAP DISPENSERS TO 44" AFF. 9. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE - STRIPE ONE 9'-0" WIDE PARKING SPACE AND A 8'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) ACCESS AISLE TO THE RIGHT OF THE ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. START THE ACCESS AISLE TO THE RIGHT OF THE EXISTING CURB CUT. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33 FOR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE REQUIRED HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. V_1TCWCt_I F`A':; TAL FLC-CSR FLAN sce►��:jd =1 �- � _ MAHON PARTY HOUSE 29th & GARY PAGE NO: A-30 s r PLAN NOTA"_ " FINISHES: FLOOR - VCT; WALLS - VINYL ON GYP. BD.; BASE - 4" RUBBER; CEILING - 2x4 SUSP. ACOUST. PANELS. 1. LAVATORY - INSULATE HOT WATER SUPPLY AND DRAIN. 2. TOILET - PROVIDE SPACER TO MEET ADA REQUIREMENTS. 3. URINAL - LOWER TO 17" AFF AT RIM. PATCH WALL. EXTEND PLUMBING AS REQUIRED. 4. REMOVE EXISTING WOOD DOOR, FRAME AND ENOUGH WALL TO INSTALL A 20 -MINUTE 36" x 80" WOOD DOOR AND FRAME TO MATCH EXISTING. SALVAGE HARDWARE AND USE ON NEW DOORS. 5. (ALTERNATE NO. 2) PARKING SPACE - STRIPE ONE 9'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) PARKING SPACE AND A 8'-0" WIDE (MINIMUM) ACCESS AISLE TO THE RIGHT OF THE ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE. CENTER THE ACCESS AISLE ON THE EXISTING CURB RAMP. PROVIDE AND INSTALL REQUIRED SIGNAGE AND PAINTED SYMBOL. SEE SHEET A33 FOR PARKING REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE AND INSTALL "VAN ACCESSIBLE" SIGN BELOW THE REQUIRED HANDICAP PARKING SPACE SIGN. S. (ALTERNATE NO. 3) - ADD VOLUME CONTROL TO PUBLIC TELEPHONE. N,nTe ®:N L Ee,-'r FART I AL fLcuR aLA�1 WOODS COMMUNITY CENTEF E. ZENITH & ERSKINI PAGE NO: A-31 PLAN ca < /----,NSULA1"E GRAIN E ry POT WATERLINE W1 0IL 0 V2" TUBULAR INSULATION ELEVATION LAVATOPY LL (D P 0 PLAN ELEVATION UPINAL GRAB BAR - LIC 2 PL AN 0 F- 4 Lu U) U. 181, ELEVATION WATEP CLOSFT Ia 0 PLAN w I__J> C) iL ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ClEvA-riot.j MIRROPS DISPENSERS TELEP"ONE- DPINKING HANDICAPPIFE) FIXTURE S(-IF-DUl F MOUNTING [-t[:-i&-4is I- IXT(A�LH-,, INDICATED t3---- 3 ---. .4 1" ON THE: PLANS ACE A 13 c D E F K F -()Q (jL--,F 131 TI.4C- PI -j) - I-lAr\)C)I(,-APPED ANI?APE 44" 17" 191, 40" 40" 4$" 36" MOUNTED IN ACC,0P(DVj(:l-F- vVITI-I TNI 5 ,')C"EDLJLE. PAGE NO: A-32 N.C. SIGN SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET ACCESSIBLE ROUTE BACK OF FACE OF CURB CONE. WALK C a ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS TO BF b" WIDE PAINTED SYMBOL W/ BLUE 13ACKGPOUND AND UJI-LITE FIGURE MIN. MIN. I—IANDIGAP PAQKING DETAIL A -- alum ,�. NO SCALE PA KINN DE:_TAIL � NO SCALE — PAGE NO: A-33 -C ABOVE SIDEWALK NG GGLUQS+ LEGEIJD E BORDER - GQEEN LVED WI4TE SYMBOL ON BLUE BACKGQAOUND 1 `v 3" • 3" GALV. STI.. TUDE SET N 00 3000 PSI j CONCRETE- FOULING TYP. VAN ACCESSIBLE - - ca.vR � LEGEND E BOk'DEQ - WHITE 00 FINE BACKGQOUND W14TI_ & F860 VE MEE PA KINN DE:_TAIL � NO SCALE — PAGE NO: A-33 N.C. SIGN A - SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET BACK OF-t----- CONC. WALK --- ACCESOIBLE ROUTE FACE OF CURE3 _T-- `- MIN. — —ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS TO BE 6" WIDE 4'-0" x 4'-0„ PAINTED "H.C:' SYMBOL W/ BLUE BACKGPOUND AND WHITE FIGURE I-IANDICAP PAPKING DETAIL A NO SCALE ABOVE SIDEWALK COLC lz& LEGEND E BORDER - GREEN WHITE SYMBOL. ON BLUE BACKGQAOUN7 +----- 3' ■ 3' GALV. STL. fUEW7 SGT IN I2'0 3000 RxN CONCRETE FOOTING TIP. S 50 -200 fits 1 mw VEW COLORS PEW i LEGEND E E CQM-R - W1 N l E L5ACK0kM)ND (MITE T—" lam- T PARKING SIGN DETAIL NO SCALE PAGE NO: A-34 w N.C. SIGNS �.. SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET BACK OF CONC. WALK MIN. MIN. ACCESSIBLE- ROUTE FACE 01- CUf3 ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS TO BE 6" WIDE a 4'-0" k 4'_0.. PAINTED "I-I.C." SYMBOI_ W/ --- EiLI'E BACKGROUND AND WHITE FIGURE 12- PA(:�KING SIGN DETAIL 6 NO SCALE 4 PAGE NO: A-35 HANDICAP PAP -KING DE -TAIL A NO SCALE -- -- cs `RESERVED I� -5 °" ABOVF Src�-WAIr ., PARKING COLORS, LEGEND f BORrER G GN WWTC- SYMBOL ON BLUE BACK,GRAOLMI J) ' 3" 3" GALV. STL rwi: SET IN 12"• 3000 P I • t 50 -N�- i CONCRETE FOOTING TYP. 0' >M1TH0(lT VERCU ! I COLORS, LEGEND t BORCJER - M6TC HACKGROUt`,D M -NTE 12- PA(:�KING SIGN DETAIL 6 NO SCALE 4 PAGE NO: A-35 00830 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL ALTERNATES A. The Bidder shall indicate alternate is in the proposal whether each an in to or deduction from the Base Bid. B.� The Owner shall be given 3 0 signed Agreement to acce t days from the price stated in the Proposal, any or all Alternates of the ' Posal. at the C. The Alternates will be may not be may by the Owner and may or accepted. D. Alternates accepted b accepted in the order listed ner will not necessarily be 1.01 ALTERNATE NO. 1. The Bidder shall state amount to be added to in his proposal the his Base Bid if the ele ator up grade noted in the the project. plans and specifications is added to 1.02 ALTERNATE NO. 2. The Bidder shall state amount to be added in his proposal the accessible to his Base Bid if the lump sum noted in the Parking space(s) with Bid in handicap plans is added to the striping and signage 1.03 ALTERNATE NO. 3. project. The Bidder shall state amount to be added in his Proposal the telephone u _ to his Base Bid if the lump sum noted in the grade to handicap accessible requirements pay Plans is added to the project. quirements 1.04 ALTERNATE NO. 4. The Bidder shall state amount to be added to in his proposal the entry doors to his Base Bid if the retrofit mof sum the specifications automatic doors noted in the project. (08710 DOOR HARDWARE) is addedlans and to the PAGE NO: A-36 SPECIAL CONDITIONS r TO: NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE Q: The City of Lubbock, having considered the proposals submitted and opened on the da of 199_, for work to be done and materials to be furnished in and for: y 7 'r I as set forth in detail in the Specifications, plans, and Contract Documents for such work for the City of Lubbock; it appearing that Your proposal is fair, equitable and to the best interest of said City, please take notice that said proposal was accepted by the City Council of the City of Lubbock on the day of 199_ at the bid price contained therein, subject to the execution of and furnishing of all contract documents, bonds, certificates of insurance, and all other documents specified and required to be executed and furnished under the contract documents. It will be necessary for you to execute and furnish to the City of Lubbock all such documents within ten (10) days from your receipt of this Notice. The five percent (501-) bid security, submitted with your proposal, will be retumed upon the: execution of such contract documents and bonds within the above specified ten (10) day period. In the event you should fail to execute and famish such contract documents and bonds within the time limit specified, said bid security will be retained by the City of Lubbock. CITY OF LUBBOCK Owner's Representative